MINI Convertible (2009) - Car

Convertible (2009) - Car MINI - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free Convertible (2009) MINI in PDF.

📄 230 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice MINI Convertible (2009) - page 3
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Convertible Car
Brand MINI
Model Convertible (2009)
Engine Displacement 1.6 L (1598 cc)
Fuel Type Gasoline (Petrol)
Power Output 120 hp (88 kW) at 6000 rpm
Transmission 6-speed manual
Drivetrain Front-wheel drive
Top Speed 180 km/h (112 mph)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h 9.1 seconds
Convertible Roof Type Power soft top with heated glass rear window
Length 3723 mm (146.6 in)
Width 1683 mm (66.3 in)
Height 1415 mm (55.7 in)
Wheelbase 2467 mm (97.1 in)
Kerb Weight 1210 kg (2668 lbs)
Fuel Tank Capacity 50 L (13.2 US gal)
Tire Size 195/55 R16 (front and rear)
Brakes Disc brakes all around (ventilated front)
Safety Features ABS, DSC, front airbags, side airbags, rollover protection
Seating Capacity 4 seats
Fuel Consumption (combined) 7.1 L/100 km (33 mpg US)
Maintenance Interval Oil change every 15,000 km or 1 year
Manual Language English (230 pages PDF)

Frequently Asked Questions - Convertible (2009) MINI

How do I operate the convertible roof on my MINI Convertible 2009?
To operate the roof, ensure the vehicle is stationary with the engine running. Pull and hold the roof switch on the overhead console. The soft top will automatically retract. Ensure there is sufficient clearance and no obstructions. The process takes about 15 seconds.
What type of oil should I use for my MINI Convertible 2009?
Use fully synthetic engine oil with viscosity SAE 5W-30 meeting BMW Longlife-01 or API SL/CF standards. The capacity is approximately 4.2 liters with filter.
What is the recommended tire pressure for the MINI Convertible 2009?
Recommended tire pressure is 2.2 bar (32 psi) for front and 2.0 bar (29 psi) for rear tires. Check when tires are cold.
Where is the fuse box located in a MINI Convertible 2009?
The fuse box is located behind a cover on the passenger side footwell. Remove the cover by pulling it outward. There is also a fusible link box under the hood near the battery.
How can I download the user manual for my MINI Convertible 2009?
Visit notice-facile.com and search for 'MINI Convertible 2009'. The manual is available for free download in PDF format (230 pages, English). Click the download button to save it to your device.
What is the common issue with the convertible roof on the 2009 Mini?
Common issues include hydraulic fluid leaks, slow operation, or the roof getting stuck. Regular maintenance of the hydraulic system and lubrication of moving parts can prevent problems. If the roof fails, check the hydraulic pump or fuses.
How do I reset the service light on a MINI Convertible 2009?
Insert the key and turn to position 0. Press and hold the odometer reset button. Turn the key to position 1 (ignition on) while holding the button. Continue holding until the service indicator resets (about 10 seconds).
What is the towing capacity of the MINI Convertible 2009?
The MINI Convertible 2009 is not designed for towing. There is no factory tow rating. Towing is not recommended as it can damage the transmission and chassis.
How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth in a MINI Convertible 2009?
Press the TEL button on the audio system. Ensure Bluetooth is enabled on your phone. Search for devices and select 'MINI'. Enter the PIN displayed on the car's screen (usually 0000). Confirm pairing.
What is the correct battery specification for a MINI Convertible 2009?
The battery is a 12V lead-acid type, typically Group 47 (H5) with 50-60 Ah capacity and 540-640 CCA. Ensure the battery is properly secured and terminals are clean.

User questions about Convertible (2009) MINI

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

Your email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone answers your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Car in PDF format for free! Find your manual Convertible (2009) - MINI and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. Convertible (2009) by MINI.

USER MANUAL Convertible (2009) MINI

Yellow Mini Cooper car driving on a cobblestone road at night, illuminated by street lights (no visible text or symbols)

COOPER COOPER S JOHN COOPER WORKS

Congratulations on your new MINI

This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent part of this vehicle. It should stay with the vehicle when sold to provide the next owner with important operating, safety and maintenance information.

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the

written consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English 11/09, 08 03 450

Printed on environmentally friendly paper,

bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

CONTENTS

The fastest way to find information on a particular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 212.

Using this Owner's Manual

4 Notes
6 Reporting safety defects

AT A GLANCE

10 Cockpit
16 Onboard monitor
20 Voice activation system

CONTROLS

26 Opening and closing
42 Adjustments
48 Transporting children safely
51 Driving
60 Everything under control
75 Technology for driving comfort and safety
88 Lamps
92 Climate
95 Practical interior accessories

DRIVING TIPS

102 Things to remember when driving

112 Starting the navigation system
114 Destination entry
126 Destination guidance
135 What to do if ...

ENTERTAINMENT

138 On/off and settings
141 Radio
149 CD player and CD changer
155 AUX-In port
156 USB-audio interface

MOBILITY

162 Refueling
164 Wheels and tires
175 Under the bonnet
179 Maintenance
181 Care
185 Replacing components
196 Giving and receiving assistance

REFERENCE

202 Technical data
207 Short commands for the voice activation system
212 From A to Z

NOTES

USING THIS OWNER'S MANUAL

We have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.

Should you wish to sell your MINI at some time in the future, remember to hand over this Owner's Manual to the new owner; it is an important part of the vehicle.

Additional sources of information

Should you have any other questions, your MINI Dealer will be glad to advise you at any time.

You can find more information about the MINI, for example on its technology, on the Internet at www.MINI.com.

SYMBOLS USED

MINI Convertible (2009) - SYMBOLS USED - 1

Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

MINI Convertible (2009) - SYMBOLS USED - 2

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.

MINI Convertible (2009) - SYMBOLS USED - 3

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

◀ Marks the end of a specific item of information.

* Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional accessories, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

… Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.
»...« Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Symbols on vehicle components

MINI Convertible (2009) - Symbols on vehicle components - 1

Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual formation on a particular part or assembly.

THE INDIVIDUAL VEHICLE

The manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW AG.

When you ordered your MINI, you chose various items of equipment. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equipment that the manufacturer of your MINI makes available with a specific model range.

Bear in mind that the manual may contain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equipment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehicle's equipment.

If your MINI features equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, observe the enclosed Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

EDITORIAL NOTICE

The manufacturer pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that MINI vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.

FOR YOUR SAFETY

Maintenance and repair

MINI Convertible (2009) - Maintenance and repair - 1

Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and powerful electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. Therefore, have the necessary work on your MINI only carried out by a MINI Dealer or a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and accessories

MINI Convertible (2009) - Parts and accessories - 1

For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by the manurer of the MINI.

When you purchase accessories tested and approved by the manufacturer of the MINI and Original MINI Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by the manufacturer of the MINI to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle.

The manufacturer of the MINI warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship.

The manufacturer of the MINI will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by the manufacturer of the MINI.

The manufacturer of the MINI cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a MINI safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants.

Original MINI Parts, MINI Accessories and other products approved by the manufacturer of the MINI, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all MINI Dealers.

Installation and operation of non-MINI approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the MINI Limited Warranty. See your MINI Dealer for additional information.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Parts and accessories - 2

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems

may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.

California Proposition 65 warning

California law requires us to issue the following warning:

MINI Convertible (2009) - California Proposition 65 warning - 1

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts,

including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

SERVICE AND WARRANTY

We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.

Your MINI is covered by the following warranties:

▶ New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

▶ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
▶ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
California Emission Control System Limited Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

For US customers

The following applies only to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

ENTERTAINMENT

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

COCKPIT

AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL: CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS

1 2 3 4 5 6 MINI 11 8 10 9 8 7

1 Adjusting the exterior mirrors, folding them in and out* 46

2

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL: CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - 2

Parking lamps 88

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL: CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - 3

Low beams 88

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL: CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - 4

Automatic headlamp control* 88

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL: CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - 5

Turn signals 55

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL: CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - 6

High beams 89

Headlamp flasher 55

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL: CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - 7

Roadside parking lamps* 89

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL: CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - 8

Computer* 61

3 Always Open Timer 62

11 Releasing the bonnet 175

4 Tachometer 12

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL: CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - 9

Instrument lighting 90

Resetting the trip odometer 60

5 Wiper system 56

6 START ENGINE STOP Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 51

7 Ignition lock 51

8 Buttons* on steering wheel

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL: CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS - 10

Continuing cruise control* 58

Right: Storing speed and accelerating or decelerating

Left: Increase or reduce volume

1/0 Activating/deactivating cruise control* 58

Telephone*:

Press: accepting and ending a call, starting dialing* of selected phone number and redialing if no phone number is selected

▶ Press longer: redialing

Activating/deactivating voice activation system* 20

Changing radio station Selecting music track Scrolling through phone book and lists with stored phone numbers

9 Horn: the entire surface

10 Adjusting the steering wheel 47

DISPLAYS

1 2 3 4 5 x 1000 RPM 10:28 +74.0° 50ms 007670ms 6789 6 7 8 UTC

1 Tachometer 60

with indicator and warning lamps 13

2 Display for

Clock 60
Outside temperature 60
Current vehicle speed 60
▶ Indicator and warning lamps 13

3 Resetting the trip odometer 60

4 Display for

Position of automatic transmission* 53
▷ Compute* 61
Date of next scheduled service, and remaining distance to be driven 65
▶ Odometer and trip odometer 60
▶ Initializing the Flat Tire Monitor* 79
▶ Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor* 81
▶ Settings and information 64
Personal Profile settings 26

5 Instrument lighting 90

6 Speedometer

with indicator and warning lamps 13

7 Control Display 16

8 Fuel gauge 61

INDICATOR AND WARNING LAMPS

The concept
Diagram of a dual-circular gauge with labeled parts, showing front and side views with numbered labels.

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in various combinations and colors in indicator area 1 or 2.

Some lamps are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Explanatory text messages
Navigation Communication Entertainment Setup Washer fluid level low!

Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Washer fluid Washer fluid Insufficient washer fluid in fluid reservoir. Refill as soon as possible, refer to Owner's Manual.

You can call up more information, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, page 70.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps in display area 1 indicate certain functions:

ED High beams/headlamp flasher 89

≠D Fog lamps* 90

O‡ Rear fog lamp* 90

Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC is regulating the drive forces in order to maintain driving stability 76

(①) Parking brake applied 52

Engine malfunction with adverse effect on exhaust emissions 180

Cruise control 58

MINI Convertible (2009) - Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps in display area 1 indicate certain functions: - 1

Turn signals 55

MINI Convertible (2009) - Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps in display area 1 indicate certain functions: - 2

AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE

Diagram of car interior with labeled parts including sensors, motors, and dashboard controls

1 MINI: Microphone for voice processing system* and for hands-free telephone*
MINI Convertible: Microphone in the steering column
2 Indicator/warning lamp * for front passenger airbags 86

3

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 2

Reading lamps* 91

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 3

Color of ambient lighting* 91

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 4

Glass sunroof, electric* 35

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 5

MINI Convertible: opening and closing the sliding/tilting roof 37

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 6

Interior lamps 90

4 Hazard warning flashers
5 Speedometer 12
6 Drive for audio CDs
7 Cover of navigation DVD drive 112

▶ Switching audio sources on/off and adjusting volume

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 7

Changing the radio station or track

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 8

Changing the audio source

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 9

Changing the frequency

8 Automatic climate control

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 10

Temperature 93

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 11

Air distribution to the windshield 93

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 12

Air distribution to the upper body area 93

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 13

Air distribution to the footwell 93

AUTO

Automatic air distribution and flow rate 93

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 14

Recirculated-air mode 93

MAX

Maximum cooling 93

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 15

Air flow rate 93

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 16

Defrosting windows 94

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 17

Cooling function* 94

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 18

Rear window defroster 94

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 19

Windshield heating 94

9 Switches in center console

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 20

Seat heating* 45

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 21

Power windows 35

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 22

MINI Convertible: central power window unit 36

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 23

Rear fog lamp* 90

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 24

Fog lamps* 90

MINI Convertible (2009) - AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 25

Central locking system, inside 30

10 AUX-In port, USB-audio interface* 155, 156
11 Driving stability control systems

▷ Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76
Dynamic Traction ControDTC* 77

12 Changing to a different menu on the Control Display 17
13 MINI joystick 16
Move in four directions, turn or press
14 Opening the start menu on the Control Display 17
15 Sport button * 78

ONBOARD MONITOR

The onboard monitor integrates the functions of a large number of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a single central position. The following section provides an

introduction to basic menu navigation. The control of the individual functions is described in connection with the relevant equipment.

CONTROLS

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and keyway controls with numbered labels

Medical illustration showing two white arrows pointing downward to a black object on a textured surface (no text or symbols)

Illustration of a hand holding a small object with four arrows pointing outward, no text or symbols present.

Medical illustration of a human head with a labeled anatomical structure (no text or symbols present)

Close-up of a hand holding a small object with a numbered arrow pointing to it, no visible text or symbols.

1 Control Display 16
2 MINI joystick

The MINI joystick can be used to select menu items and to adjust settings:

Move in four directions, arrows 5
Turn, arrow 6
▶ Push, arrow 7

3 Opening start menu 17
4 Changing to another menu 17

Operate the MINI joystick only when traffic and road conditions allow this, to avoid endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.

▶ Navigation system
Onboard information, e.g. for displaying the average fuel consumption

Communication*

Telephone, refer to separate Owner's Manual

Entertainment

Radio
CD player and CD changer*
AUX-In port, USB-audio interface* for external audio device

Setup

▶ Switching off Control Display
▶ Tone and display settings
▶ Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central locking system
▷ Display of service requirements and dates for statutory emissions and vehicle inspections
▶ Check Control

OPERATING PRINCIPLE

As of radio readiness, the following message appears on the Control Display:

Warning! Use this system only when traffic conditions permit. Safe vehicle operation is the driver's responsibility. For further details see owner's manual. Accept

To hide the message:

Press the MINI joystick.

The start menu is displayed.

The message is automatically hidden after approx. 10 seconds.

Start menu
Navigation Communication Entertainment Setup

All onboard monitor functions can be called up via four menu items.

Opening start menu

Press the button.

To open the start menu from the Setup menu: Press the button twice.

Calling up menu items in the start menu

Via the start menu you can call up the four menu items of Navigation, Communication, Entertainment and Setup: move the MINI joystick forward or backward or press it. Depending on the selection, the menu last opened is displayed.

Changing between menu items

Press the button.

Pressing the button repeatedly opens the Communication, Navigation and Entertainment menu items in succession. The screen that was last open is displayed.

Displays in menu
1 2 Menu item 2 Menu item 3 Menu item 4 Menu item 5 Menu item 6 Menu item 7 Settings 1

1 Each menu is subdivided into fields.
2 White symbol: the field is active. Gray symbol: the field is inactive.

Menu item 2... Menu item 4 Menu item 5 Menu item 6 Menu item 7 Menu item 8 Settings 3 4

1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizontal or vertical lists.
2 Additional menu items can be selected in this field.
3 Settings are represented graphically or as numerical values.

4 A curved line shows that menu items can be selected in lists. The beginning and end of a list are each marked by a circle.

Operating principle at a glance

The following is a general description of operations using the onboard monitor.

For an exemplary step-by-step application, refer to Setting the time, page 68.

graph TD A["Menu item 1"] --> B["Menu item 2"] B --> C["Menu item 3"] C --> D["Menu item 4"] D --> E["Menu item 5"] E --> F["Menu item 6"] F --> G["Menu item 7"] G --> H["Menu item 8"] H --> I["Settings"] I --> J["Menu item 9"] J --> K["Menu item 10"] K --> L["Settings"] L --> M["Menu item 11"] M --…

1 Highlighting a menu item:

Turn the MINI joystick; the highlight marker moves
Menu items that are displayed in color on the Control Display can be highlighted

2 Confirming a menu item:

▷ Press the MINI joystick
New menu items are displayed or the function is executed
▶ Select a function by highlighting and confirming it

3 Highlighting a menu item: refer to 1

4 Switching between fields:

Briefly move the MINI joystick to the left, right, forward or backward
Release the MINI joystick

5 Adjusting settings:

Turn the MINI joystick
▶ Graphic display, numerical value or text displays can be changed
▶ Confirm by switching to another field

STATUS INFORMATION
Communication Entertainment Setup 103.5 12 3 Tall 01:45 PM 1 2 3 4 5

1 Display for:

Entertainment: Radio, CD and external audio source* or
Telephone in "Communication": Name of the connected mobile phone, network search or no network

2 Entertainment audio output off or display for traffic information*:

"TI": Reception of traffic information for the navigation system is possible and is switched on

3 Display for:

New entries present in "Missed calls"*
▶ Roaming active

4 It is possible to make calls * if the mobile phone is paired with the vehicle Reception strength of mobile phone network, depending on mobile phone

5 Time

Other displays: Status information is temporarily hidden during Check Control message displays or entries via the voice activation system*.

SWITCHING CONTROL DISPLAY OFF/ON

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Display off".

Display off — Info sources — Traffic Info Travel Info Service Info

To switch on, press the MINI joystick.

The voice activation system allows you to control operation of various vehicle systems without removing your hands from the steering wheel.

Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. It is not necessary to use the MINI joystick.

The voice activation system transforms oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions.

Precondition

Via the onboard monitor, select the language in which the voice activation system is operating, so that the spoken commands can be identified. Setting the onboard monitor language, page 73.

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

MINI Convertible (2009) - Symbols in the Owner's Manual - 1

〉...〈 Say the specified commands word for word.

»...« Indicates responses of the voice activation system.

SAYING COMMANDS

Activating voice activation system

  1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a circular indicator light showing a signal waveform (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal indicate that the voice activation system is ready to receive spoken commands.

Navigation Communication Entertainment Setup

  1. Say the command.

The command appears on the Control Display.

CD ... CD 04 14 00:00 Tak Entertainment

This symbol is displayed on the Control Display when you can enter additional commands. If no further commands are possible, continue

by operating the item of equipment via the onboard monitor.

Terminating or canceling voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or

MINI Convertible (2009) - Terminating or canceling voice activation system - 1

Cancel

Commands

Having the possible commands read aloud

You can have the system read aloud the possible commands related to the selected menu item on the Control Display.

Having the possible commands read aloud:

MINI Convertible (2009) - Having the possible commands read aloud - 1

Options

For instance, if you have selected "CD", the commands available for operating the CD player and CD changer are read out.

Opening help

MINI Convertible (2009) - Opening help - 1

Help<

Using alternative commands

There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:

MINI Convertible (2009) - Using alternative commands - 1

Radio on< or >Turn radio on<

Calling up functions immediately via short commands

Short commands enable you to perform certain functions immediately, irrespective of which menu item is selected, page 207.

Opening the start menu

MINI Convertible (2009) - Opening the start menu - 1

Main menu

Example: selecting a track

  1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Example: selecting a track - 1

  1. Entertainment The system says:

    Entertainment<<

CD ... CD 04 14 Track 4 00:00 Entertainment

MINI Convertible (2009) - Example: selecting a track - 3

  1. CD< The system says: >>CD on<<

CD ... CD 04 14 Track 4 00:00 CD

  1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Example: selecting a track - 5

  1. Select a track, e.g.:

    Track 1<
    The system says:

    Track 1<<

CD ... 01 1:4 Track 1 00:00 Track 1

NOTES

MINI Convertible (2009) - NOTES - 1

For information on voice control of the telephone, refer also to the separate

Owner's Manual.

For voice commands, bear in mind the following:

▶ Pronounce the commands and digits smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses. The same applies to spelling when entering a destination for navigation.
Always speak the commands in the language of the voice activation system.
When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name.
Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.
Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Close-up of a textured surface with a dark circular object at the bottom (no visible text or symbols)

Close-up of a car's seatbelt with a circular emblem on the lid (no visible text or symbols)

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

ENTERTAINMENT

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

OPENING AND CLOSING

KEYS/REMOTE CONTROLS

Two identical circular industrial control knobs with black and white buttons, no visible text or symbols

Remote control

Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. You should therefore use each remote control at least twice a year to maintain the charge status. In vehicles equipped with convenient access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, page 35.

If more than one remote control unit is used, the settings called up and implemented depend on which remote control is recognized when the car is unlocked, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

In addition, information about service requirements is stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in the remote control, page 179.

New remote controls

Your MINI Dealer can supply new remote controls as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss.

Integrated key
Mechanical component diagram showing a valve with a handle and internal structure, no text or symbols present

Press button 1 to release the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

Driver's door, page 29.
MINI Convertible: Glove compartment, refer to page 96.
MINI Convertible: Locking the rear seat backrest 105.

PERSONAL PROFILE

The concept

The functions of your MINI can be set individually. By means of Personal Profiles, most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control is recognized and the settings stored for it are called up and implemented.

This means that your settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your car was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings.

At most three remote controls can be set for three different people. A prerequisite is that each person uses a separate remote control.

Personal Profile settings

For more information on specific settings, refer to the specified pages.

Response of the central locking system when the car is being unlocked 27

▶ Automatic locking of the vehicle 30
▶ Triple turn signal activation 55
▶ Settings for the displays on the onboard monitor, in the speedometer and in the tachometer:

12h/24h mode of the clock 69
Date format 70
▶ Brightness of the Control Display 74
Language on the Control Display 73
Units of measure for fuel consumption, distance covered/remaining distances and temperature 65

Show visual warning for Park Distance Control PDC* 75
Light settings:

▶ Pathway lighting 88

Daytime running lamps 89

▶ Automatic climate control: activating/deactivating the AUTO program, setting the temperature, air volume and air distribution 93
Entertainment:

Audio volume 139
▶ Tone control 139
▶ Speed-dependent volume control 139

CENTRAL LOCKING SYSTEM

The concept

The central locking system is ready for operation whenever the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:

Doors
▶ Tailgate
▶ Fuel filler door

Operating from outside

▶ Via the remote control
Via the door lock*

In cars with convenient access*, via the door handles on the driver's and passenger's sides.

The anti-theft system is also operated at the same time. It prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or door handles. The remote control can also be used to switch on/off the welcome lamps and interior lamps. The alarm system* is also activated or deactivated, page 32.

Operating from inside

Button for central locking system, page 30.

In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and interior lamps come on.

OPENING AND CLOSING: FROM OUTSIDE

MINI Convertible (2009) - OPENING AND CLOSING: FROM OUTSIDE - 1

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside.

Take the key with you when you leave the vehicle so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

Using the remote control

Unlocking

Press the button.

The welcome lamps and interior lamps come on.

Unlocking mode

You can also set which parts of the car are unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control in use.

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

  1. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.

  2. Select "Settings".

info sources — Settings Display settings Vehicle / Tires Language / Units Time / Date Traffic Info settings Bluetooth

  1. Select "Vehicle and tires".
  2. Select "Door locks".

Lighting Door locks Central locking ... Unlock button All doors Relock if not opened Lock after driving

  1. Select "Central locking".
  2. Select "Unlock button".
  3. Select a menu item:

"All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.
"Driver's door" Press the button once to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler door. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.

Door locks Central locking All doors Driver's door All doors if not opened after driving

Convenient opening

Hold the button down.

The power windows are opened and the glass sunroof* is raised. In the MINI Convertible, the windows and the sliding sunroof are opened.

In order to open the convertible top of your MINI Convertible: release button and push again until the convertible top is completely open. The side window remains open.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Convenient opening - 1

Convenient closing is not possible by means of the remote control.

Locking

Press the button.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there is any person inside, because the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.

Setting confirmation signals

To have the vehicle confirm when it has been locked or unlocked.

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".
  4. Select "Vehicle and tires".
  5. Select "Door locks".
  6. Select "Confirmation".

Door locks ... Central locking - Confirmation - Flash when locking Flash when unlocking Acoustic confirm. when locking Acoustic confirm. when unlocking

  1. Select the desired signal.

The signal is activated.

Acoustic signals can be selected in vehicles with an alarm system.

Switching on interior lamps

While the car is locked:

MINI Convertible (2009) - Switching on interior lamps - 1

Press the button.

You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages, etc.

Unlocking the tailgate

Press the button.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Unlocking the tailgate - 1

When it is opened, the tailgate swings upward and outward to the rear. Make sure that adequate clearance is available before opening.

To prevent accidentally locking yourself out, do not place the key down in the cargo bay. If the tailgate was locked before opening, it will be locked again after it is closed.

Before and after each trip, check that the tailgate has not been inadvertently unlocked.

Malfunctions

The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key. If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is discharged. Use this remote control during an extended drive; this will recharge the battery, page 26.

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:

FCC ID:

LX87665

LX8766E

LX8CAS

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device must not cause harmful interference, and

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

MINI Convertible (2009) - For US owners only - 1

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Using the door lock

Diagram of a pendulum with a fulcrum and a hanging mass, showing motion direction (no text or labels)

You can set which parts of the car are unlocked, page 27.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Using the door lock - 2

When there is no alarm system* or convenient access*, only the driver's door is locked with the door lock.

To lock all doors, the fuel filler door and the tailgate together:

With the doors closed, press the interior central locking button, page 30 to lock the vehicle.

Unlocking and opening the driver or passenger door, page 30.

Locking the vehicle.

Lock the driver's door with the integrated key via the door lock, or

press the safety lock button on the passenger's door and close the door from the outside.

Convenient operation

With an alarm system* or convenient access*, the windows and glass sunroof * can be operated via the door lock.

Hold the key in the position for unlocking or locking.

In the MINI Convertible, the convertible top closes first, followed by the folding sunroof, and finally the side windows close.

During the roof closing process (in case of the convertible top also during the opening process) ensure no one gets pinched. Releasing the key stops the operation.

Manual operation

In the event of an electrical malfunction, the driver's door can be unlocked or locked by turning the integrated key in the door lock to the end positions.

OPENING AND CLOSING: FROM INSIDE

Close-up of a car air conditioner panel with a magnified inset showing internal components (no visible text or symbols)

The switch locks or unlocks the doors and tail-gate when the doors are closed, but the anti-theft system is not activated. The fuel filler door remains unlocked*.

Unlocking and opening

Either unlock the doors together using the switch for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or
pull on the door handle of either door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Locking

▶ Press the switch or
press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. Take

the key with you when you leave the vehicle so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

Automatic locking

You can also set the situations in which the car locks. The setting is stored for the remote control in use.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".
  4. Select "Vehicle and tires".
  5. Select "Door locks".
  6. Select "Central locking".

Door locks Central locking — Confirmation Unlock button All doors Relock if not opened Lock after driving

7. Select a menu item:

"Relock if not opened" The central locking system automatically locks the vehicle after a short time when no door has been opened.
"Lock after driving" The central locking system automatically locks the vehicle as soon as you drive off.

The setting is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

TAILGATE

To avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance before opening the tailgate.

Opening

MINI Convertible (2009) - Opening - 1

In some national-market versions, the tailgate cannot be unlocked using the remote of unless the vehicle is unlocked first.

Close-up of a white toilet door with a directional arrow pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button in the handle, arrow, or the button of the remote control, for an extended period. The tailgate is unlocked and can be opened.

MINI Convertible

Top-down view of a car trunk showing the rear canopy and internal storage area (no text or symbols visible)

MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Convertible - 2

The maximum load that may be placed on the open trunk lid is 175 lbs/80 kg.

Manual release in the MINI Convertible

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can also unlock the tailgate manually.

  1. Use the integrated key and open the back-rest 1 lock.

3D rendered mechanical component with numbered callouts (1, 2), no visible text or symbols

  1. Press button 2 and fold down backrest together with the belt strap.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a small dark object, no visible text or symbols.

  1. Pull the handle, see arrow. The tailgate is released.

Closing

MINI Convertible (2009) - Closing - 1

Make sure that the closing path of the tail-gate is clear, otherwise injuries may

occur.

Top-down view of a white appliance front panel with two circular buttons and a central knob (no text or symbols visible)

The handle recesses on the interior trim panel of the tailgate make it easier to pull it down.

ALARM SYSTEM*

The principle

The alarm system, when activated, reacts if:

A door, the engine compartment lid or the tailgate is opened
There is movement inside the car
The car's inclination changes, for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away
There is an interruption in the power supply from the battery

The alarm system briefly indicates unauthorized entry or tampering by means of:

An acoustic alarm
▶ Switching on the hazard warning flashers

Arming and disarming

Whenever the car is locked or unlocked, the alarm system is armed or disarmed.

Even when the alarm system is armed, you can open the tailgate by means of the button on the remote control.

When you subsequently close the tailgate it is again locked and monitored.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Arming and disarming - 1

On certain national-market versions, unlocking via the door lock triggers off the alarm.

Panic mode*

You can activate the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button for at least two seconds.

Switching off the alarm:

Press any button.

Switching off an alarm

▶ Unlock the car with the remote control.
Insert the key fully into the ignition lock.
In cars with convenient access*, press the button on the door lock.

Display on the revolution counter

When the system is armed, all LEDs pulse. After approx. 16 minutes one LED flashes.

Close-up of a hand holding a circular gauge or dial, with no visible text or symbols

▶ LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed.
One LED flashes at short intervals: a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is not properly closed. Even if these are not closed fully, the remaining items are deadlocked and the LEDs pulse after approx. 10 seconds for approx. 16 minutes. Afterwards, one LED flashes.
The interior movement detector is not activated.

▶ LEDs go out after the vehicle is unlocked: No attempt was made to tamper with the car.

▶ LEDs flash after unlocking until the key is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: an attempt was made to tamper with the car.

Tilt alarm sensor

The vehicle's inclination is monitored. The alarm is triggered, for instance, if an attempt is made to steal the car's wheels or tow it away.

Interior movement detector

Before the interior movement detector can operate correctly, the windows and glass roof must be closed.

MINI Convertible

The passenger compartment is monitored up to the height of the seat's surface. This way, the anti-theft alarm system including the interior motion sensor are armed, even if the convertible top is open. Falling objects, e.g. tree leaves, may

trigger a false alarm, refer to Avoiding false alarms.

Avoiding false alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement detector can be switched off together.

This prevents false alarms, e.g. in the following situations:

In duplex garages
When being transported on car-carrying trains, ferries or trailers
▶ If pets are to remain inside the car

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior movement detector

Press the button on the remote control twice in succession.
Lock the vehicle twice with the integrated key.

LEDs flash in short succession for approx. 2 seconds.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement detector are switched off until the car is next unlocked and locked.

CONVENIENT ACCESS*

Convenient access enables you to enter your vehicle without having to hold the remote control in your hand. All you need to do is wear the remote control close to your body, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control within the immediate vicinity or in the passenger compartment.

Convenient access supports the following functions:

▶ Unlocking/locking the vehicle
▶ Unlocking the tailgate by itself
Starting the engine
▶ Convenient operation
MINI Convertible: Convertible top operation

Functional requirements

The vehicle or the tailgate can only be locked when the vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is outside of the vehicle.
The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked again until after approx. 2 seconds.
The engine can only be started when the vehicle detects that the remote control is inside the vehicle.
The doors and tailgate must be closed to be able to operate the windows and glass sunroof.

Comparison to standard remote controls

In general, there is no difference between using convenient access or pressing the buttons on the remote control to carry out the functions mentioned above.

Instructions on opening and closing are found starting on page 26.

Special features regarding the use of convenient access are described below.

If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing the windows, the glass sunroof or the convertible top, the system is checking whether a remote control is inside the vehicle.

Repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary.

To unlock
Close-up of a car door handle with a curved handle and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

Press button 1.

Convenient opening with the remote control, refer to page 28.

Locking

Press button 1.

For convenient closing, press and hold button 1. The power windows and the glass sunroof* are closed.

MINI Convertible: If a remote control is inside the vehicle, windows and convertible top can be opened and closed as soon as the remote is operational.

Unlocking the tailgate separately

Press the button on the outside of the tailgate.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Unlocking the tailgate separately - 1

If the vehicle detects that a remote control has been accidentally left inside the locked vehicle's cargo bay after the tailgate is closed, the tailgate will reopen slightly. The hazard warning flashers flash and an acoustic signal* sounds.

Windows and glass sunroof, electric*

If the engine is switched off, you can still operate the windows and glass sunroof so long as a door or the tailgate has not been opened.

If the doors and tailgate are closed again and the remote control is located inside the vehicle, the windows and the glass sunroof can be operated again.

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock to be able to operate the windows or glass sunroof when the engine is switched off and the doors are open.

Switching on radio readiness

Switch on radio readiness by briefly pressing the start/stop button, page 51.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Switching on radio readiness - 1

Do not depress the brake or the clutch, otherwise the engine will start.

Starting the engine

The engine can be started or the ignition can be switched on when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition lock, page 51.

Switching off the engine in cars with automatic transmission

The engine can only be switched off when the selector lever is in position P, page 52.

To switch the engine off when the selector lever is in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition lock.

Before driving a vehicle with automatic transmission into a car wash

  1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
  2. Depress the brake.
  3. Move the selector lever to position N.
  4. Switch off the engine.
    The vehicle can roll.

Malfunction

Convenient access may malfunction due to local radio waves.

If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or using the integrated key.

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock and start the engine.

Warning lamps

MINI Convertible (2009) - Warning lamps - 1

The warning lamp comes on when an attempt is made to start the engine: the engine cannot be started. The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition lock.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Warning lamps - 2

The warning lamp comes on when the engine is running: the remote control is no longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is switched off, the engine can only be restarted within approx. 10 seconds.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Warning lamps - 3

The indicator lamp comes on and a message appears on the Control Display: replace the battery in the remote

control.

Replacing the battery

The remote control for convenient access contains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.

  1. Remove the cover.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular dial and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

  1. Insert the new battery with the plus side facing up.
  2. Press the cover on to close.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Replacing the battery - 2

Take the old battery to a battery collection point or to your MINI Dealer.

GLASS SUNROOF, ELECTRIC*

MINI Convertible (2009) - GLASS SUNROOF, ELECTRIC* - 1

To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the glass sunroof and keep it in

your field of vision until it is shut.

Take the key with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the sunroof and possibly injure themselves.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car interior with a circular base and directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

Raising

Press the switch backward to the resistance point and hold it there.

Both glass sunroofs are raised.

Releasing the switch stops the movement.

With the ignition switched on, press the switch backward beyond the resistance point.

Both closed sunroofs are raised fully. Pressing again stops the movement.

Opening, closing

With the ignition switched on and the glass sun-roof raised, press the switch backward and hold it there.

The front glass sunroof opens.

The rear glass sunroof is closed.

Releasing the switch stops the movement.

The glass sunroof can be closed in the same way by pressing the switch forward.

The front glass sunroof remains in a raised position. The rear glass sunroof is raised. Pressing on the switch again closes both sunroofs completely.

Convenient operation via door lock or convenient access, refer to page 28, 29, 34.

Roller sun blind

The roller sun blind can be opened and closed independently of the glass sunroof.

Following interruptions in electrical power supply

After a power failure, there is a possibility that the glass sunroof can only be raised. In this case, have the system initialized. The manufacturer of your MINI recommends that you have this work done by your MINI Dealer.

WINDOWS

MINI Convertible (2009) - WINDOWS - 1

To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the windows.

Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the electric windows and possibly injure themselves.

MINI Convertible (2009) - WINDOWS - 2

If, after a window is opened and closed several times in close succession, the window can only be closed and not opened, the system is overheated. Let the system cool for several minutes with the ignition switched on or the engine running.

Opening

Close-up of a vehicle front panel showing engine, dashboard, and air vent (no text or symbols visible)

Press the switch downwards. The window opens until you release the switch.

Tap the switch downwards. As soon as the remote is ready, the windows will open automatically. Tap the switch again to stop the opening movement.

MINI: Closing

The window can be closed in the same way by pressing the switch up.

MINI Convertible: Closing

In order to close the window, press the switch up. The window closes until you release the switch.

Electric power windows initializing

If the battery was disconnected, e.g. for changing batteries or vehicle storage, reinitialize the power window switch, otherwise the windows will not be lowered.

MINI Convertible: Opening the convertible top is not possible.

  1. Close the doors.

  2. Open both windows.

  3. Close both windows.

In the event of a system malfunction, please contact your MINI Dealer.

MINI Convertible: Central power window unit

Interior view of a car air conditioner unit showing vent, buttons, and control panel (no visible text or labels)

Press the switch downwards. First the rear windows, then the front windows open until the button is released.

Tap the switch downwards. With ignition turned on: rear and front window open automatically. Tap the switch again to stop the opening movement.

To close the window, push the button upward and hold.

Do not close the windows until the closing procedure for the convertible top is finished. Otherwise it is not ensured that the side windows will close properly against the rubber seals of the convertible top. Convertible top, refer to page 38.

After switching off the ignition

When the ignition is switched off, the windows can still be operated for approx. 1 minute as long as no door is opened.

Take the key with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the electric windows and possibly injure themselves.

MINI: Pinch protection system

This function does not apply to the MINI Convertible.

If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.

Even though there is the pinch protection system, always ensure that the window's travel path is clear, otherwise the safety system

might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing.

Do not install any accessories that might interfere with window movement. Otherwise the pinch protection system could be impaired.

Closing without pinch protection

If there is an external danger, or if ice on the windows, etc., prevents you from closing the windows normally, the window can be closed manually.

  1. Press the switch upward and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.
  2. Press the switch upward again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protection.

CONVERTIBLE TOP WITH INTEGRATED SLIDING SUNROOF

To conserve battery power, if possible operate the convertible top only while the engine is running.

Prior to closing the convertible top, check for and remove all debris from the windshield frame, otherwise the closing of the top may be hampered.

Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
Mechanical component with directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

To open:

Press the switch backward until the desired position or the end position is reached. To close:

Press the switch forward.

The sliding sunroof can be operated up to a road speed of 74 mph / 120 km/h.

Power convertible top

The fully automatic convertible top provides protection from the weather, combined with simple and easy operation.

So that you can get the most enjoyment out of your MINI Convertible, here are some helpful tips:

It is recommended that you close the convertible top whenever the vehicle is parked. The closed convertible top not only protects the vehicle interior from damage due to unforeseen bad weather, but also provides a certain degree of protection against theft Always keep your valuables inside the locked luggage compartment, even if the convertible top is closed.
Do not mount any roof rack systems on the convertible top.
When opening the wet convertible top, e.g., after driving in the rain, water drops may enter the luggage compartment. In order to avoid water stains or soiling, remove all objects from the luggage compartment, if necessary.

If the temperature drops below +10 °F / - 12 °C, do not operate the convertible top, otherwise damages may occur.

Do not leave a wet convertible top open for more than one day, since the humidity may cause damages.

Do not place any objects on the convertible top, as they could otherwise fall off while the convertible top is being operated and result in property damage or personal injury.

If the rollover protective system is extended, do not operate the convertible top.

Always completely finish the operation of the convertible top. Driving off before an opening or closing procedure is completely finished can lead to property damage or personal injury.

Do not reach into the moving parts during the opening and closing procedure. Keep children away from the pivoting range of the convertible top.

For safety reasons, only operate the convertible top while the vehicle is standing.

While opening and closing, the convertible top pivots upward. If operating the convertible top inside a garage or under a bridge, or similar low structure, ensure the minimum clearance is 2 m, otherwise the vehicle may be damaged.

Before opening and closing

▶ Please observe the previous safety instructions.
Please ensure the luggage compartment roll-up cover is in its lowest position, refer to page 105, otherwise the convertible top cannot be opened.
▶ Ensure the cargo does not push against the luggage compartment roll-up cover from below.
▶ Ensure the tailgate is closed.

Opening and closing the convertible top

Close-up of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

To open:

Press the switch backward in order to open the sliding/tilting sunroof. Pressing the button again opens the convertible top.

To close:

Press the switch forward.

Operating while driving

The convertible top may be opened or closed while driving not faster than 20 mph/30 km/h. While operating the convertible top, pay close attention to the surrounding traffic, otherwise an accident may happen. Try to avoid operating the convertible top while reversing the vehicle since the rear view is very limited during the convertible top's movement. Do not operate the convertible top when driving on winding and rough roads or during windy conditions.

For better control

The LED lights up during convertible top operation until the opening or closing procedure is completely finished.
The LED flashes after releasing the switch. The opening or closing procedure has not yet been completed. The procedure can be continued in the desired direction by pressing the appropriate button.
The indicator lamp Convertible top not locked lights up and a message is indicated on the Control Display.

Interruption

A convertible top which is not completely open or closed is hazardous.

The automatic movement is immediately interrupted when the button for the convertible top operation is released. The procedure can be continued in the desired direction by pressing the appropriate button

If the opening or closing procedure is interrupted by releasing the respective button, the convertible top stays in its current position for several seconds before it slowly moves into a more stable position. The procedure can be continued by pressing the appropriate button.

The opening and closing procedure is also interrupted in case of a mechanical blockage. In this case, in order to operate the convertible top again:

  1. Turn off the ignition and then switch it on again.
  2. Press the button to continue the procedure in the desired direction.

Opening and closing procedure

MINI Convertible (2009) - Opening and closing procedure - 1

Do not interrupt and restart the closing procedure several times one after another, or the convertible top mechanism could be damaged.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Opening and closing procedure - 2

If the convertible top can be moved in only one direction after several consecutive attempts to operate it, the convertible top system has overheated. Allow the system to cool down for approx. 4 minutes.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Opening and closing procedure - 3

If the battery was disconnected, e.g. for changing batteries or vehicle storage, reinitialize the power windows, refer to page 36. Otherwise the windows cannot be lowered or the convertible top cannot be opened.

Convenient operation

For convenience operation using the remote control refer to page 27, for operation via the door lock refer to page 29.

Manual closing in the event of an electrical malfunction

MINI Convertible (2009) - Manual closing in the event of an electrical malfunction - 1

Only close the convertible top manually if it is absolutely necessary. Never open it manually. Improper handling of the convertible top can result in damage. The closing procedure must be completely finished. Otherwise, damage or injury could result.

Before closing

  1. Remove allen key and screwdriver from vehicle tools, refer to page 190.

  2. Pry out luggage compartment lamp from the left side trim using the screwdriver.

Interior view of a car trunk showing a triangular panel and a close-up of the handle mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Use the screwdriver and turn the gold-colored screw, see arrow, one and a half turns in the direction of the arrow.

Releasing the convertible top

  1. Push cover panel forward, see arrow 1.
  2. In order to unlock the convertible top use the allen key to loosen the screws of the locking devices, see arrows 2.

Technical diagram showing mechanical components with numbered annotations pointing to specific parts

  1. Release the second side frame.

Closing the convertible top

  1. Place both hands on the convertible top on the respective side frame.

Interior view of a car showing dashboard and seatbelt components (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Lift out both sides at the same time, and swing the convertible top forward onto the cowl.

  2. Inside the vehicle, use a screwdriver to pry out the cover in the center of the roof.

To close the sliding sunroof

  1. Insert the hexagon wrench into the recess in the center of the roof and push upward, see arrow 1.

Diagram showing a mechanical or electrical component with labeled parts 1 and 2, likely illustrating a valve or actuator mechanism.

  1. Turn the hexagon wrench in the direction of arrow 2.
  2. Open both locking mechanisms and remove the locking pieces.
  3. Insert the pins into the respective recess in the cowl, see arrow.

Interior view of a car showing dashboard and intake manifold, with an inset close-up of a person using a tool (no visible text or symbols)

To lock the convertible top

Turn hexagon wrench in the opposite direction of arrow 2 until the convertible top is securely locked.

MINI Convertible (2009) - To lock the convertible top - 1

Please contact your MINI Dealer to have the electrical malfunction repaired.

WIND DEFLECTOR*

With the convertible top open, the wind deflector keeps air movement in the passenger compartment to a minimum, thus providing you with a more pleasant drive, even at higher speeds.

Do not let the wind deflector come into contact with pointy objects as these may damage the net. No not place objects on the installed wind deflector. When stowing the wind deflector, ensure that it is not damaged by objects.

Before installing

  1. Take the wind deflector out of the pouch.
  2. Unfold the wind deflector, see arrows 1.

Diagram illustrating the folding process of a propeller blade, with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating folding direction.

  1. Press the locking device together until it engages, see arrow 2.

Installing and folding up
1 2

  1. Push out retaining pin 2 on one side until it engages.
  2. Insert wind deflector with retaining pins into the openings 1 and 2 on that side of the vehicle.
  3. On the opposite side of the vehicle, insert the retaining pin 1 into the opening, pushing against the spring load.
  4. Push out retaining pin 2 on one side until it engages.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a black plastic tray and white arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Fold up the upper part of the wind deflector.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Before installing - 4

If a seat is in its rearmost position, do not recline the backrest too far, otherwise the

wind deflector could be damaged.

Removing and folding

Remove the deflector following the reverse sequence.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with a highlighted component (no text or symbols)

Push the release lever towards the center of the wind deflector and fold both halves together.

ADJUSTMENTS

SITTING SAFELY

The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In conjunction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the following section.

For additional information on transporting children safely, refer to page 48.

Airbags

MINI Convertible (2009) - Airbags - 1

Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered off. No one and nothing is to come between the airbags and the seat occupant.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Ensure that the front passenger is correctly seated, e.g. that no feet or legs are propped against the dashboard. Otherwise, leg injury could result if the front airbag suddenly deployed.

Make sure that passengers keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not lean against the cover of the head airbag of the MINI; otherwise, serious injuries can result when the airbag deploys.

Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circumstances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only temporary.

For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 85.

Head restraint

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Head restraint - 1

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Head restraints, refer to page 44.

Safety belt

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Safety belt - 1

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap.

Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low across the hips and does not press against the abdomen. The safety belt must not rest against the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt so that it is pulled taut across the lap and shoulder, fitting the body snugly without any twists. Otherwise the belt could slide over the hips in the event of a frontal collision and injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise its restraining effect could be impaired.

Safety belts, refer to page 45.

SEATS

Note before adjusting

MINI Convertible (2009) - Note before adjusting - 1

Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond with unexpected movement, and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

On the front passenger seat as well, do not

incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection normally provided by the belt.

Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 44 and on damaged safety belts on page 46.

Seat adjustment

MINI Convertible (2009) - Seat adjustment - 1

Observe the instructions on page 42 to ensure the best possible personal pro-

tection.

Interior view of a car seat with directional arrows indicating traffic flow (no text or symbols)

Longitudinal adjustment

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat to the desired position, arrows 2.

After releasing the lever, move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages properly.

Height

1 2 2 7

Pull up or push down the lever repeatedly, arrows 1, until the desired height is reached, arrows 2.

Backrest

Diagram showing a car interior with numbered directional arrows indicating movement or flow, labeled 1 and 2.

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary, arrows 2.

Lumbar support*

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.

Illustration of a robotic arm with a circular head and directional arrows indicating motion or movement (no text or symbols)

Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the curvature.

Entry to the rear

Convenient entry

The convenient entry feature includes a mechanical memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.

Close-up of a car's seatbelt mechanism with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

  1. Pull up the lever on the seat backrest, arrow 1.

The backrest folds forward.

  1. Move the seat forward by pushing on the backrest, arrow 2.

Previous position

  1. Push the seat back into its previous position.

Do not fold the backrest up until the seat is in its previous position. Otherwise, the seat will engage in its current position. In this case, adjust the longitudinal position manually, page 43.

  1. Fold the backrest back up to lock the seat.

When moving the seat backwards, ensure that you do not cause personal injury or property damage.

Before driving off, engage the front seats and seat backrests. Otherwise there is a risk of accident due to unexpected movement.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question. Reinstall the head restraint before transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise, the passenger will be without protection from the head restraint.

Height adjustment
Two identical 3D-rendered objects with directional arrows indicating movement or force, no text or symbols present.

To raise: pull up.

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Removing
Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with labeled parts and an upward arrow indicating motion or force direction.

MINI: Front

  1. Pull up as far as it will go.
  2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.
  3. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint out as far as it will go.
  4. Fold back the backrest.

MINI Convertible: Front

  1. Pull up as far as it will go.
  2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.
  3. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint out as far as it will go.
  4. Additionally press button 2 and pull the head restraint out completely.
  5. Fold back the backrest.

Rear

  1. Pull up as far as it will go.
  2. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint out completely.

SEAT HEATING*

Close-up of a car dashboard with control panel and buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Switching on

Press once for each temperature level. Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature. If you continue driving within the next 15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature.

The temperature is lowered or the heating is switched off entirely to save on battery power. The LEDs stay lit.

Switching off

Press button longer.

SAFETY BELTS

MINI Convertible (2009) - SAFETY BELTS - 1

Observe the instructions on page 42 to ensure the best possible personal pro-

tection.

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Front and rear seats

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt buckle and seatbelt buckle (no text or symbols visible)

Closing

Make sure you hear the lock engage in the belt buckle.

The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted properly, page 42.

Opening

  1. Grasp the belt firmly.
  2. Press the red button in the buckle.
  3. Guide the belt into its reel.

MINI Convertible: rear belt guide

MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Convertible: rear belt guide - 1

Please ensure that the belt guide loop, arrow, is locked when putting on the rear

seat belts.

Close-up of a mechanical component with curved surfaces and a black arrow indicating a specific feature (no text or symbols present)

Seat belt reminder

Front seats

MINI Convertible (2009) - Front seats - 1

The indicator lamps come on and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display. Check whether the safety belt has

been fastened correctly. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued when the driver's safety

belt has not been fastened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also activated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt has not been fastened, if objects are placed on the front passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger unfasten their safety belts.

Damage to safety belts

If the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident: have the safety belt system and its seat-belt tensioners replaced and the belt anchors checked. Have this work carried out only by a MINI Dealer or by a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer, otherwise correct operation of these safety systems is not ensured.

MIRRORS

Exterior mirrors

The front passenger's mirror is more convex than the driver's mirror. The objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind you on the basis of what you see in the mirror; otherwise there is an increased risk of an accident.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a pointed tool and two circular adjustment knobs labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on the main subject)

1 Adjusting the left or right exterior mirror
2 Folding mirrors in and out *

Manual adjustment

The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press the edge of the glass.

Folding mirrors in and out*

Turn the knob beyond the pressure point in direction 2. The mirrors can be folded in at road speeds up to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for example, or for moving mirrors that were folded in by hand back out into their correct positions.

Automatic heating*

At outside temperatures below a certain limit, both exterior mirrors are automatically heated while the engine is running or the ignition switched on.

Interior rearview mirror

Diagram of a car interior showing a circular dial and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

To reduce glare from vehicles behind you when you are driving at night:

Turn the knob.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming*

Close-up of a car dashboard with a circular dial and a cursor pointer (no text or symbols visible)

The automatic dimming feature of the interior rearview mirror* is controlled by two photo cells in the mirror. One photo cell is in the mirror frame, arrow; the other is on the back of the mirror.

In order to ensure that the system functions correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror

and windshield, and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly in front of the mirror.

STEERING WHEEL

Adjustments

MINI Convertible (2009) - Adjustments - 1

Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion, otherwise there

is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve mechanism with directional arrows (no text or labels)

  1. Fold the lever down.
  2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred distance and angle to suit your seated position.
  3. Swing the lever back up.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Adjustments - 3

Do not use force to swing the lever back up, otherwise the mechanism

will be damaged.

TRANSPORTING CHILDREN SAFELY

THE RIGHT PLACE FOR CHILDREN

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, otherwise they could endanger themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.

Children should always sit in the rear

Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

Only transport children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in a child-restraint system suitable for their age, weight and size. Otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Children 13 years of age or older must be buckled in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child-restraint system that is appropriate for their age, size and weight.

Only install child seats in the rear when the rear seat backrest is folded all the way back and engaged. Otherwise there will be an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Exception for front passenger seat

Front passenger airbags

Should it be necessary to use a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front and side airbags must be deactivated. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child if the airbags deploy, even if the child is seated in a child-restraint system. For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 86.

CHILD-RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, INSTALLATION

Observe the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when selecting, installing and using child-restraint systems. Otherwise the protective effect may be diminished.

On the front passenger seat

After installing a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that the front and side airbags for the front passenger are deactivated, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.

Seat position

Before installing a child-restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back and up* as possible to obtain the best possible position for the belt. Do not change the seat position after this.

Child seat security

Interior view of a car seatbelt with visible seatbelt and rear seats (no text or symbols)

All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the front passenger can be prevented from being pulled out in order to secure child-restraint systems.

To lock the safety belt

  1. Secure the child-restraint system with the belt.
  2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.

  3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut against the child-restraint system.

The safety belt is locked.

To unlock the safety belt

  1. Open the belt buckle.
  2. Remove the child-restraint system.
  3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the way.

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.

MINI Convertible (2009) - To unlock the safety belt - 1

To install and use the LATCH child-restraint system, follow the operating and safety instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system, otherwise the protective function of the seat may be compromised.

Anchor points for LATCH anchors

Before installing the child's seat, pull the belt out of the area for the child-restraint fixing system.

Interior view of a car showing a hand pressing down on a white surface with two black buttons, and an inset image of a smartphone displaying its screen (no text or symbols visible)

The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the labeled protective caps.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Anchor points for LATCH anchors - 2

Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors are properly engaged and that the childrestraint system rests firmly against the seat backrest, otherwise the protective function of the seat may be compromised.

Child-restraint system with tether strap

MINI Convertible (2009) - Child-restraint system with tether strap - 1

Use the tether strap anchors to secure child-restraint systems only, otherwise the anchors could be damaged.

Interior view of a car showing two white arrows pointing to a rectangular panel or casing (no text or symbols visible)

There are two additional anchors for child-restraint systems with tether straps, arrows.

Placement of the tether strap

MINI Convertible (2009) - Placement of the tether strap - 1

Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise the strap will not properly secure the child-restraint system in the event of an accident.

MINI
1 2 7 6 5 3 4

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Tether strap hook

4 Cargo bay floor

5 Anchor

6 Seat backrest

7 Tether strap of the child-restraint system

  1. Push the head restraint upward.
  2. Guide the tether strap between the head restraint holders.
  3. Attach the tether strap to the anchor using the hook.
  4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.

  5. Attach the tether strap to the anchor using the hook.

  6. Pull the retaining strap tight.

MINI Convertible

MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Convertible - 1

Ensure that the upper strap 9 is passed between the seat backrest 8 and the rollover protection system with cross bar 3; otherwise, the strap will not be able to properly secure the child-restraint system.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Rollover protection system with cross bar
4 Cargo bay cover
5 Cargo bay floor
6 Tether strap hook
7 Anchor
8 Seat backrest
9 Tether strap of the child-restraint system

  1. Push the head restraint upward.
  2. Unlock backrest and slightly fold forward, see page 105.
  3. Guide the tether strap between the head restraint holders.
  4. Attach the tether strap to the anchor using the hook.
  5. Fold backrest back and lock in place. Push headrest down as far as possible.
  6. Pull the retaining strap tight.

DRIVING

IGNITION LOCK

Inserting the key into the ignition lock

Close-up of a car interior showing a highlighted engine component with an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

Insert the key all the way into the ignition lock.

Radio readiness

Individual electrical consumers can operate.

Removing the key from the ignition lock

Press in the key briefly. It is ejected slightly.

At the same time:

The ignition is switched off if it was on beforehand.

Automatic transmission

You cannot take out the key unless the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.

START/STOP BUTTON

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted section and arrow pointing to a circular feature (no visible text or symbols)

Press the start/stop button to switch radio readiness or the ignition on and off. Do not depress the brake or clutch while doing so.

When you press the start/stop button and depress the clutch if the car has manual transmission or the brake if the car has automatic transmission, the engine starts.

Radio readiness

Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and outside temperature are displayed in the tachometer.

Radio readiness is switched off automatically:

When the key is removed from the ignition lock
When using convenient access* by pushing the button on the door handle or the button on the remote control, refer to Locking on page 34
After a certain has elapsed

Ignition on

Most indicator and warning lamps in indicator area 1, page 13, light up for varying lengths of time.

When the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electrical consumers in order to preserve the battery.

Radio readiness and ignition off

All indicator and warning lamps in the displays go out.

The ignition automatically turns off* when the driver's door is opened. Pressing the start/stop button again switches the ignition back on.

The ignition is not switched off in situations such as the following:

The clutch or brake is depressed
The low beams are switched on

STARTING THE ENGINE

Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed spaces; otherwise inhalation of the nox-

ious exhaust gases can lead to unconsciousness and death. Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running, otherwise such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard.

Before leaving the car while the engine is running, place the transmission in neutral or move the selector lever to position P and forcefully apply the parking brake to prevent the car from moving.

MINI Convertible (2009) - STARTING THE ENGINE - 1

Avoid frequent starting in quick succession or repeated start attempts in which

the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.

Do not let the engine warm up with the vehicle at a standstill. Move off immediately at a moderate engine speed.

When starting the engine, do not depress the accelerator pedal.

Close-up of a car dashboard with a black arrow pointing to a circular component (no visible text or symbols)

Manual transmission

Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with convenient access, refer to page 33.

  1. Depress the brake.
  2. Depress the clutch.
  3. Press the start/stop button.

Automatic transmission

Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with convenient access, refer to page 33.

  1. Depress the brake.
  2. Shift the selector lever into position P or N.
  3. Press the start/stop button.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE

MINI Convertible (2009) - SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE - 1

Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

When parking, apply the parking brake forcefully, otherwise the vehicle could begin to roll.

Manual transmission

  1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/stop button.
  2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
  3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

Automatic transmission

  1. With the car at a standstill, move the selector lever to position P.
  2. Press the start/stop button.
  3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

Before driving into a car wash

By following these steps, the vehicle is able to roll:

  1. Place the remote control, even with convenient access, in the ignition lock.
  2. Depress the brake.
  3. Move the selector lever to position N.
  4. Switch off the engine.

PARKING BRAKE

The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

Applying

The lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a shaft inserted into a gear shift lever (no text or labels)

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Releasing - 2

In exceptional cases, if the parking brake has to be used to slow or stop the car,

do not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, continuously press the button of the parking brake lever.

Otherwise, excessive force could lead to overbraking and loss of traction, i.e. fishtailing, at the rear axle.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

R 1 3 5 2 4 6

MINI Convertible (2009) - MANUAL TRANSMISSION - 2

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise

the engine could be damaged if you inadvertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.

Reverse gear

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION* WITH STEPTRONIC

In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can shift gears manually using Steptronic, page 54.

Parking the vehicle

MINI Convertible (2009) - Parking the vehicle - 1

To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always select position P and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running.

Removing the key

  1. Move the selector lever to position P.
  2. Switch off the engine.
  3. Remove the key.

Selector lever positions

PRNDM / S + -

Displays in the tachometer

x1000 RPM 10:28 +74.0°F M4 007670mls 6783

P R N D DS M1 to M6

The selector lever position is displayed, or the current gear in the manual mode.

Changing selector lever positions

The selector lever can only be moved out of position P if the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: interlock.
Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise the selector lever will refuse to move: shiftlock.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Changing selector lever positions - 1

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, de-the brake until you are ready to start.

A lock prevents accidental shifting into selector lever positions R and P.

Overriding the selector lever lock

Close-up of a mechanical gear shift lever with hand and wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Press the button on the front of the selector lever, arrow.

P Park

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The transmission locks to prevent the drive wheels from turning.

R Reverse

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral

Select this when you are in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position

Position for normal vehicle operation. All forward gears are selected automatically.

Under normal operation conditions, fuel consumption is lowest when you drive in position D.

Kick-down

Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum performance.

Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the full-throttle resistance point.

Sport program and manual operation M/S

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a hand operating the mode (no text or symbols visible)

Move the selector lever from position D to the left into the M/S shifting slot:

The Sport program is activated and DS is displayed. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style.

To deactivate the sport program or manual mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Shifting with the selector lever

Push the selector lever forward or pull it back to activate manual operation. Steptronic shifts the gear.

▶ Pull the selector lever in the + direction. Transmission shifts up.
▶ Push the selector lever in the – direction. Transmission shifts down.

The tachometer displays M1 to M6.

To use the automatic mode again, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to over-rev will not be executed by the system. The selected gear is displayed briefly, followed by the actual gear.

Shifting on the steering wheel*

With the selector lever in position D, automatic drive, you can shift gears using the shift paddles on the steering wheel. The transmission automatically switches to manual mode.

If you do not shift gears with the shift paddles or accelerate for a certain amount of time, the transmission automatically returns to D, automatic drive.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

▶ Pull one of the shift paddles. Transmission shifts up.
▶ Push one of the shift paddles. Transmission shifts down.

M1 to M6 is displayed in the gear indicator.

Manually unlock the selector lever lock

Should the selector lever refuse to move out of position P even though the ignition is switched on, the brake is depressed and the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:

  1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
  2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out. Disconnect the cable connector if necessary.

Close-up of a hand using a tool to adjust a mechanical component, with an inset showing a rope or cable being inserted (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Take the hub cover remover 1 out of the onboard tool kit and insert it in the loop on the front passenger side.
  2. Pull the loop up.
  3. Move the selector lever into the desired position by pressing the button on the front of the selector lever.

Only unlock the selector lever lock manually when the vehicle is to be towed. Do not forget to firmly apply the parking brake prior to the tow, otherwise the vehicle may roll away.

Turn signals/ headlamp flasher

1 1 2 MINI

1 Turn signal indicator
2 Headlamp flasher

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To turn off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that an indicator bulb has failed.

Indicating a turn briefly

Press the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.

Triple turn signal activation

Press the lever as far as the resistance point. You can set whether the turn signal is to flash once or three times.

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".
  4. Select "Vehicle and tires".

  5. Select "Lighting".

Lighting — Door locks — Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps Pathway lighting 60 s

  1. Select "Triple turn signal".

√ Triple turn signaling is activated.

WIPER SYSTEM

Diagram showing a mechanical component with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating motion or flow.

1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent mode or rain sensor*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps*

Switching on wipers

Press the lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Normal wiper speed

Press once.

The system switches to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed

Press twice or press beyond the resistance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*

If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is preset.

If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

Press button, arrow 3.

Deactivate the rain sensor before entering an automatic car wash. Failure to do so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.

Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain sensor

  1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 51.
  2. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

10:28 +74.0° SET/INFO

  1. Press and hold the button until the display changes.
  2. Briefly press the button repeatedly until the symbol and "SET" are displayed.

Camera control interface screenshot showing speedometer, speed slider, and 'SET' button with icon A

  1. Press and hold the button until the display changes.

x 1000 RPM min max

  1. Press the button to select the desired sensitivity.
  2. Wait, or press and hold the button until the display changes. The settings are stored.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

Press the button again, arrow 3.

Brief wipe

Press the lever downward once, arrow 2.

Cleaning windshield and headlamps*

Pull the lever, arrow 4.

Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated briefly.

When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.

In cars equipped with an alarm system, the headlamps cannot be cleaned when the bonnet is open.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Cleaning windshield and headlamps* - 1

Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will change the washer pump.

Only use the washers if the bonnet has been completely closed, otherwise the headlamp washer system* may be damaged. Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield. If you do, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze.

Window washer nozzles

The window washer nozzles are heated automatically* while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

MINI: Rear window wiper
0 1 2 3

0 Rear wipers parked

1 To switch on intermittent wipe :

Turn the cap to level 1.

Operation is continuous in reverse gear.

Cleaning the rear window

2 To clean the rear window during intermittent wipe 📋

Turn the cap further to level 2 and hold it there.

3 To clean the rear window when wipers are parked ☐:

Turn the cap to level 3 and hold it there.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Cleaning the rear window - 1

Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will ge the washer pump.

WASHER FLUID

Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep it away from ignition sources, store it only in the closed original container and keep it out of reach of children, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury. Comply with the instructions on the container.

Washer fluid reservoir

Only refill washer fluid that contains anti-freeze when the engine is cool, to avoid contact with hot engine parts. Otherwise, fluid

spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to personal safety.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a close-up of the engine compartment with a close-up inset of the valve (no text or symbols visible)

Fill with water and, if required, with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recommendations.

Mix the water and antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir to make sure the correct concentration is maintained.

Capacity

Approx. 2.6USquarts/2.5liters.

With headlamp washer system:

Approx. 4.8 US quarts/4.5 liters.

CRUISE CONTROL*

The concept

Cruise control is available at vehicle speeds of at least approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the button on the steering wheel.

Do not use cruise control when driving at constant speed is prevented by adverse conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice or loose surfaces. Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.

Activating

Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with numbered parts and a close-up view of the main dial.

1 Resuming cruise control
2 Activating/deactivating cruise control
3 Maintaining, storing and increasing speed
4 Maintaining, storing and decreasing speed Indicator lamp in the speedometer lights up.
The cruise control system is ready and can be activated.

Activating/deactivating cruise control

Press button 2.

In addition, the system is automatically deactivated:

When the brakes are applied
When the clutch is depressed
When the automatic transmission is in selection lever position N
When the driving stability control system is active

Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved again and maintained.

The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is switched off.

Maintaining current speed

Press button 3.

The system maintains and stores the current vehicle speed.

If, on a downhill grade, the engine braking effect is not sufficient, the controlled speed may be exceeded. On uphill grades vehicle speed may drop if the engine output is insufficient.

Increasing speed

Press button 3 repeatedly until the desired speed is reached. Every time you press the button, the speed increases by approx. 1 mph or approx. 2 km/h.

Accelerating using the button

Press and hold button 3.

The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the driving speed is maintained and stored.

Decreasing speed

Press button 4 repeatedly until the desired speed is reached.

The functions here are the same as for increasing the speed or accelerating, except that the speed will be decreased.

Resuming a speed stored beforehand

Press button 1.

The last speed stored is achieved again and maintained.

The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is switched off.

Display in tachometer*
x1000 RPM 50 mph 007670m/s 6789

Selected speed is displayed briefly.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Resuming a speed stored beforehand - 2

If --- mph or --- km/h is displayed briefly in the tachometer, the conditions neces-

sary for operation may not be fulfilled.

Malfunction

MINI Convertible (2009) - Malfunction - 1

The warning lamp in the tachometer lights up if the system fails. A message appears on the Control Display.

EVERYTHING UNDER CONTROL

ODOMETER, OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY, CLOCK

x1000 RPM +74.0°F 10:28 007670mls 6789 1 2 3

1 Outside temperature display and clock or current speed
2 Odometer and trip odometer
3 Resetting the trip odometer

Units of measure

Select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as ° F or ° C for the outside temperature, page 65.

Outside temperature display, time

Setting the time, refer to page 68.

Outside temperature warning

When the displayed temperature sinks to approx. +37 °F/+3 °C, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of black ice.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Outside temperature warning - 1

Black ice can also form at temperatures above +37 °F/+3 °C. Therefore, drive

carefully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the shade, otherwise there is an increased accident risk.

Current vehicle speed

To have the current speed shown in the upper display otherwise serving for the outside temperature display and clock.

  1. Press the button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until the current speed appears in the lower display.
  2. Wait for the speed display to automatically move to the upper display.

The outside temperature then appears in the lower display.

Odometer and trip odometer

Resetting the trip odometer

With the ignition switched on, press knob 3 in the tachometer.

When the vehicle is parked

To display the time, outside temperature and odometer briefly after the key is removed from the ignition lock:

Press knob 3 in the tachometer.

TACHOMETER

10.25 -74.5V M4

Never operate the engine with the needle in the red overspeed zone of the gauge. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

COOLANT TEMPERATURE

A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addition, a message will appear on the Control Display.

Check coolant level, refer to page 177.

FUEL GAUGE

MPH 100

Fuel tank capacity

Approx. 13.2 US gallons/50 liters.

You can find information on refueling on page 162.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Reserve

Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone of approx. 2.1 US gallons/8 liters the remaining indicator lamps change from orange to red, arrow, and a message is displayed briefly on the Control Display. The tachometer displays the remaining cruising range. When the range is less than approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains in the Control Display.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Reserve - 1

If the range displayed is less than

30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; otherwise engine functions are not guaranteed and damage could occur.

COMPUTER*

Displays in tachometer

+74.0 m/s 10:28 154 m/s M4 007670 m/s 6789

Press the button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly to call up various items of information.

The following items of information are displayed in the order listed:

Cruising range
Average fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption
Average speed
Current vehicle speed
MINI Convertible: Always Open Timer

To set the corresponding units of measure, refer to Units of measure on page 65.

Cruising range

Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Cruising range - 1

If the range displayed is less than

30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; otherwise engine functions are not guaranteed and damage could occur.

Average fuel consumption

Calculated for the time the engine has been running.

With the trip computer, page 63, you can have the average consumption for another trip displayed.

To reset average fuel consumption: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumption

Displays the current fuel consumption to allow you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with minimum exhaust emissions.

Average speed

Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.

With the trip computer, page 63, you can have the average speed for another trip displayed.

To reset average speed: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Current vehicle speed

To have the current speed shown in the upper display otherwise serving for the outside temperature display and clock.

  1. Press the button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until the current speed appears in the lower display.

  2. Wait for the speed display to automatically move to the upper display.

The outside temperature then appears in the lower display of the computer.

Always Open Timer

If driving the MINI Convertible with its soft top down, the driving times are displayed digitally on the tachometer.

x1000 RPM +74.0 10:28 Trip 00 12:00h 02:00h

The following driving times are displayed:

To reset the "Trip" display: Push the button on the turn signal lever or the Reset trip distance button for approx. 2 seconds, refer to page 12.

To reset the total driving time, contact your MINI Dealer.

Analog Always Open Timer

The analog Always Open Timer indicates the number of hours and minutes that you drove with the convertible top down. A maximum of 6 hours and 59 minutes can be displayed.

The total driving time is displayed digitally in the tachometer.

1 2

1 LED hour display
2 Minute display

Displays on the Control Display

To open the computer via the onboard monitor, basic operation on page 16.

  1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

  1. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Navigation" and press the MINI joystick.

  2. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "Car Data".

Navigation → Car Data → Add Onboard Info ... 4:10 pm Arrival time 330 mls Range 279 mls Dist to dest. 48.5 mph Speed 35.6 mpg Consumption

  1. Select "Onboard info".

Car Data ... Onboard info — Trip computer 4:10 pm Arrival time 330 mls Range 279 mls Dist to dest 48.5 mph Speed 35.6 mpg Consumption

▶ Estimated time of arrival at destination:

Manually enter a distance in the computer, refer to information further below
Enter a destination in the navigation system, page 114

Cruising range

Distance to destination:

Manually enter a distance in the computer, refer to information further below
Enter a destination in the navigation system, page 114

Average speed

Average fuel consumption

Resetting values

To reset the values for the average speed and average fuel consumption:

  1. Select the respective menu entry.
  2. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the message.

Entering a distance manually

  1. Select "Dist. to dest.".

Car Data ... Onboard info ... 4:10 pm 330 mls 279 mls 48.5 mph 35.6 mpg Arrival time Range Dist. to dest. Speed Consumption

  1. Turn the MINI joystick to select the distance to your destination.
  2. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting. The distance is mandated automatically during destination guidance.

Trip computer

The trip computer is suitable e.g. for a holiday trip.

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Navigation" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Car Data".
  4. Select "Trip computer".

Car Data — Onboard info — Trip computer — Lim 4:10 pm Departure 05:40 hr Duration 279 mls Distance traveled 48.5 mph Speed 35.6 mpg Consumption

Departure time
Driving time
Distance traveled
Average speed
Average fuel consumption

To switch trip computer on/off and to reset all values to zero:

  1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the third field from the top.
  2. Press the MINI joystick. Other menu items are displayed.

  3. Select the desired menu item.

▷ "Start"
"Stop"
▷ "Reset"

SETTINGS AND INFORMATION

Operating principle
10:25 +34.0+ SEM INFO MINI

graph LR A["2"] --> B["CHECK INFO"] C["3"] --> D["SERVICE INFO"] D --> E["4"] E --> F["23:20 SET"] F --> G["5"] G --> H["12.12.2002 SET"] H --> I["6"] I --> J["HOME"]

Certain settings and information are only available when the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is at a standstill and the doors are closed.

1 Button for:

▶ Selecting display
Setting values
▶ Confirming selected display or set values
▶ Calling up computer information 61

2 Calling up Check Control 70
3 Displaying vehicle check 71
4 Setting the time 68
5 Setting the date 69
6 Exiting the menu

Exiting displays
x 1000 RPM HOME

  1. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.
  2. Press the button for a longer period.

The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.

Displays are also exited if no entries are made for approx. 8 seconds.

Next setting or item of information
x 1000 RPM NEXT

  1. Within a setting or item of information, briefly press the button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.
  2. Press the button for a longer period.

The display changes directly to the next setting or item of information.

UNITS OF MEASURE

To set the units of measure. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

  1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

  1. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.

  2. Select "Settings".

  3. Select "Language / Units".
  4. Select "Units".

Language - Units Consumption mpg US Distance mls Pressure psi Temperature °F

  1. Select the menu item to be set.
  2. Select the desired unit of measure.

SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
x 1000 RPM mls 10000 12/2012

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are briefly displayed immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.

MINI Convertible (2009) - UNITS OF MEASURE - 3

The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by your

MINI Dealer.

Possible displays

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, speedometer, and Mini vehicle (no visible text or symbols)

10000 MIS 10000 MIS 10000 MIS 10000 MIS 10000 MIS 12/2012 MIS 12/2012 SERVICE HOME NEXT

1 Button for selecting information
2 Engine oil
3 Front brakes
4 Rear brakes
5 Vehicle check

6 Roadworthiness test
7 Brake fluid
8 Exit display 65
9 Next setting or item of information 65

More information on the MINI Maintenance System can be found on page 179.

Supplementary information

You can have further information on the scope of maintenance displayed on the Control Display, refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Info sources".

Info sources — Settings — Dis Traffic Info Travel Info Service Info

  1. Select "Service Info".
  2. Select "Service requirements".

Service requirements Status Front brake pads Rear brake pads Brake fluid Vehicle check State inspection

  1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Select "Status".

A list of selected maintenance operations and, if applicable, inspections required by law is displayed.

Service requirements ... Status Front brake pads Rear brake pads Brake fluid Vehicle check State inspection

You can have further information displayed on each entry: Select an entry.

100 mls Rear brake pads Service due soon. Please make an appointment with your MINI dealer.

Exiting the menu

←→ Select the arrow.

Symbols

MINI Convertible (2009) - Symbols - 1

No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching. Please

schedule a service appointment.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Symbols - 2

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering deadlines for legally required inspections*

Make sure the date on the Control Display is always set correctly, page 69, otherwise the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not ensured.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.

  3. Select "Info sources".

  4. Select "Service Info".

  5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "Service requirements".

  6. Select "Status".

  7. Select "State inspection".

Service requirements ... Status Front brake pads Rear brake pads Brake fluid Vehicle check State inspection

  1. Select "Set service date". The month is highlighted.

  2. Turn the MINI joystick to make the adjustment.

10 / 2014 Set service date State inspection Next state safety inspection: see above date.

  1. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.

  2. Turn the MINI joystick to make the adjustment.

  3. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.

Exiting the menu

Select the arrow

MINI Convertible (2009) - Exiting the menu - 1

CLOCK

In the tachometer

Setting the time

  1. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

10:28 +74.0°F SET/INFO

  1. Press and hold the button until the display changes.
  2. Briefly press the button repeatedly until the symbol and "SET" are displayed.

11:20 SET

  1. Press and hold the button until the display changes.
  2. Press the button to set the hours.
  3. Wait for the display to change to minutes.
  4. Press the button to set the minutes.
  5. Wait for the display to change. The settings are stored.

On the onboard monitor

Setting the time

  1. Press the button once or twice until the start menu appears.

Navigation Communication Entertainment Setup

  1. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  2. Turn the MINI joystick until "Settings" is selected and press the MINI joystick.

info sources — Settings Display settings Vehicle / Tires Language / Units Time / Date Traffic Info settings Bluetooth

  1. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time / Date" is selected and press the MINI joystick.

Settings Display settings Vehicle / Tires Language / Units Time / Date Traffic Info settings Bluetooth

  1. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time" is selected and press the MINI joystick.

Time — Date Set time 04 : 24pm Time format 12 hour Hour memo

  1. Turn the MINI joystick until "Set time" is selected and press the MINI joystick.

Time Set time 04 : 24pm Time format 12 hour Hour memo

  1. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and press the MINI joystick.
  2. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and press the MINI joystick.

The system accepts the new time.

Setting the time format

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".
  4. Select "Time / Date".
  5. Select "Time".
  6. Select "Time format".
  7. Select the desired format.

Switching on the hour signal*

You will hear three tones just before each full hour.

Select "Hour memo".

The hour signal is activated.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

DATE

In the tachometer

Setting the date

  1. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

10:28 +74.0°F SET/INFO

  1. Press and hold the button until the display changes.
  2. Briefly press the button repeatedly until the symbol and "SET" are displayed.

12.12.2002 SET

  1. Press and hold the button until the display changes.
  2. Press the button to set the day of the month.
  3. Wait for the display to change to month.

  4. Set the month and year in the same way.

  5. Wait for the display to change. The settings are stored.

On the onboard monitor

Setting the date

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".
  4. Select "Time / Date".
  5. Select "Date".

Time - Date - Set date 10.08.2011 Date format DD/MM

  1. Select "Set date".
  2. Turn the MINI joystick to make the adjustment.
  3. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.
  4. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the date is stored.

Setting the date format

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".
  4. Select "Time / Date".
  5. Select "Date".
  6. Select "Date format".

  7. Select the desired format.

CHECK CONTROL

The concept

The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the systems monitored. Check Control messages involve indicator and warning lamps in the display and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal as well as text messages at the bottom of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

2 grouded this

Close-up of a circular analog dial with a central scale and pointer (no visible text or numbers)

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in various combinations and colors in the indicator areas 1 and 2.

Explanatory text messages

Navigation Communication Entertainment Setup Washer fluid level low!

Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Washer fluid Washer fluid Insufficient washer fluid in fluid reservoir. Refill as soon as possible, refer to Owner's Manual.

For most Check Control messages, you can view more information later, e.g. regarding the cause of a malfunction and how to respond, refer to page 72.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

To exit the displayed information:

←→ Select the arrow.

Hiding Check Control messages
Close-up of a medical device with a metallic tool inserted into a circular component (no visible text or symbols)

Press the button in the turn indicator lever.

Check Control messages Lighting system! Stop vehicle Engine oil at minimum level! Washer fluid level low!

Some Check Control messages are displayed until the malfunctions have been rectified. They cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions occur at the same time, they are displayed in succession.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Other Check Control messages are automatically hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Explanatory text messages - 5

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

x1000 RPM 007670ms 678

This symbol indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. Check Control messages can be viewed whenever it is convenient.

Viewing stored Check Control messages

Stored Check Control messages can only be displayed if the driver's door is closed.

  1. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

10:28 +74.0°F SET/INFO

  1. Press and hold the button until the display changes.

  2. Press the button repeatedly until the display shows the corresponding symbol and "CHECK INFO".

CHECK INFO

  1. Hold the button down.

"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check Control messages.

If a Check Control message has been stored, the corresponding message is displayed. In addition, the text message appears on the Control Display.

  1. Briefly press the button to check for other messages.

Viewing more information later

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Info sources".

Info sources — Settings — Dis Traffic Info Travel Info Service Info

  1. Select "Service Info".

  2. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "Check Control messages".

Check Control messages Lighting system! Stop vehicle Engine oil at minimum level! Washer fluid level low!

  1. Select a text message.

Washer fluid Washer fluid Insufficient washer fluid in fluid reservoir. Refill as soon as possible, refer to Owner's Manual.

Exit display:

←→ Select the arrow.

SPEED LIMIT

Enter a speed, and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area.

You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

  1. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Navigation" and press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Car Data".

  3. Select "Limit".

Car Data —Trip computer —Limit —Stopwatch Change limit. 50 mph On Select current speed

  1. Select "Change limit:".
  2. Turn the MINI joystick to set the limit.
  3. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.

The limit is automatically activated.

Applying your current speed as limit

Select "Select current speed".

The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Activating the limit

Select "On".

MINI Convertible (2009) - Activating the limit - 1

Limit is activated.

STOPWATCH

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the

MINI Convertible (2009) - STOPWATCH - 1

This opens the start menu.

  1. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Navigation" and press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Car Data".
  3. Select "Stopwatch".

Car Data ... Onboard Info — Limit — Stopwatch Start Stop Interim time Reset 00:06:13 00:00:15

Starting, stopping or resetting

Select "Start". The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
Select "Reset". The stopwatch is reset and restarts if it was running beforehand.
Select "Stop". This stops the timer.

Taking an interim time reading

Select "Interim time".

The interim time appears below the ongoing primary stopwatch count.

All of the remaining functions remain available at all times while the stopwatch is running. The stopwatch continues operation in the back-ground.

ALTERING SETTINGS

Language on the Control Display

The language of the Control Display can be set. Refer to the basic principles on page 16. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".

info sources — Settings Display settings Vehicle / Tires Language / Units Time / Date Traffic Info settings Bluetooth

  1. Select "Language / Units".

  2. Select "Language".

Language Units Text language English US Navigation voice instructions Display arrow view

  1. Select "Text language".

The language for the display texts and navigation messages can be changed.

  1. Select the desired language.

Brightness of the Control Display

The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. Note, however, that you can change the basic setting while the low beams are switched on. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

  1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

  1. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Settings".
  3. Select "Display settings".
  4. Select "Brightness".

Brightness Display min. max.

  1. Select "Brightness".
  2. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired setting is reached.

TECHNOLOGY FOR DRIVING COMFORT AND SAFETY

PARK DISTANCE CONTROL PDC*

The concept

PDC assists you with parking backwards. Acoustic signals and a visual indicator warn you of the presence of an object behind the vehicle. To measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors in either bumper.

These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm from the rear corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear center sensors.

MINI Convertible (2009) - The concept - 1

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed, otherwise physical circumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late.

Automatic mode

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated automatically after approx. 1 second when you engage reverse gear or move the automatic transmission selector lever to position R. Wait this short period before driving.

Acoustic signals

As the distance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds.

If the distance remains constant, e.g. when driving parallel to a wall, the acoustic signal stops after approx. 3 seconds.

Malfunction

MINI Convertible (2009) - Malfunction - 1

Indicator lamp comes on: PDC is malfunctioning. A message appears on the Control Display. Have the system

checked.

To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not direct the jet toward the sensors for lengthy periods and only spray from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.

PDC with visual warning

To have the system show distances to objects on the Control Display. The contours of distant objects are shown on the Control Display even before the acoustic signal sounds.

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

MINI Convertible (2009) - PDC with visual warning - 1

  1. Press the
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".

Settings Audio Display settings Vehicle / Tires Language / Units Time / Date Bluetooth

  1. Select "Vehicle and tires".

  2. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "PDC".

Door locks - FTM - PDC PDC display on

  1. Select "PDC display on".

√ The PDC display is activated. It is shown on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated. The setting is stored for the remote control in use.

System limitations

Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Sensors, too, have blind spots in which objects cannot be detected. Moreover, ultrasonic detection can reach its physical limits with objects such as trailer tow bars and couplings, thin and wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects already indicated, such as curbs, may enter the sensors' blind spots before or after a continuous audible signal is given. Higher, protruding objects, such as wall ledges, may not be detectable. Therefore, always drive cautiously, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or property damage. Loud sound sources outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal.

DRIVING STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEMS

Your MINI has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with driving stability control systems. An appropriate driving style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore do not

reduce the additional safety margin by engaging in hazardous driving thereby running the risk of an accident.

Antilock Brake System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.

Braking safely, refer to page 103.

Among others, ABS includes the following functions:

Cornering Brake Control CBC
Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
Brake Assist

Cornering Brake Control CBC

Driving stability and steering characteristics are further enhanced while braking in turns or during a lane change.

Electronic brake-force distribution EBV

The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

Brake Assist

Rapidly depressing the brake causes this system to automatically develop maximum braking force. Thus, the system helps keep braking distance to a minimum. At the same time, all the benefits provided by ABS are exploited.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the full braking application.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC

DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accelerate. The system also recognizes unstable driving conditions, for example if the rear of the car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting at an angle past the front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions at the individual wheels.

DSC also encompasses the following functions:

Antilock Brake System ABS
Electronic brake-force distribution EBV
Brake Assist
Cornering Brake Control CBC
▶ Hill Start Assist

Deactivating DSC
DSC OFF

Press the button repeatedly until the DSC indicator lamps come on. DSC is deactivated. Stabilizing and propulsion promoting actions are no longer executed.

When driving with snow chains or to 'rock free' in snow, it can be helpful to switch off DSC for a brief period.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC

Press the button again: the DSC indicator lamps go out.

For better control

MINI Convertible (2009) - For better control - 1

If the indicator lamp flashes:

The DSC controls the driving and breaking forces.

MINI Convertible (2009) - For better control - 2

If the indicator lamps are on:

DSC is deactivated.

MINI Convertible (2009) - For better control - 3

Dynamic Traction Control DTC*

DTC is a type of DSC that is propulsion optimized for special road conditions such as uncleared snowy roads. The system ensures maximum propulsion though with restricted driving stability. You therefore need to drive with suitable caution.

In the following exceptional situations, it can be useful to briefly activate DTC:

when driving on snow-covered inclines, in slush, or on uncleared snowy roads
when rocking the vehicle free, driving out of deep snow or on loose surfaces
when driving with snow chains

Activating DTC
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with DTC indicator (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Press the button: the DTC indicator lamps come on.

For better control

MINI Convertible (2009) - For better control - 1

If the indicator lamp flashes: DTC controls the driving and breaking forces.

DTC

MINI Convertible (2009) - For better control - 2

If the indicator lamps are on: DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again: the DSC indicator lamps go out.

Deactivating both DTC and DSC

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with DTC button (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Press the button for at least 3 seconds: the DSC indicator lamps in the display elements come on. The Dynamic Traction Control DTC and Dynamic Stability Control DSC are both deactivated. There will be no more stabilizing interventions.

Interventions (differential lock*) in braking occur to improve propulsion when drive wheels are rotating unevenly, even when the DSC is deactivated.

Activating DSC

Press the button again: the indicator lamps go out.

Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist aids you in comfortably driving off on inclines. It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this.

  1. Hold the MINI with the brake.
  2. Release the brake and immediately drive off.

Hill Start Assist holds the car in place for approx. 2 seconds after the brake is released.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Hill Start Assist - 1

Depending on the load and gradient, the vehicle can roll backward slightly during this period. After you release the brake, immediately start driving since the hill start assist only holds the vehicle for about 2 seconds, and it will start to roll backwards.

SPORT BUTTON*

Pressing the button causes your MINI to respond even more sportily.

Engine responds more spontaneously to movements of the accelerator.
▶ Steering response is more direct.
With automatic transmission:
▶ More rapid gear shifting in Sport program.

Activating the system

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a 'SPORT' button highlighted (no other text or symbols)

Press the SPORT button.

The LED lights up.

SPORT is briefly displayed in the tachometer.

Deactivating the system

Press the SPORT button again.
▷ Switch off the engine.

FLAT TIRE MONITOR FTM*

The concept

The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the individual tires while moving.

If a tire loses pressure, its rolling circumference changes, and this in turn alters the speed of rotation. This change is detected and is reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirement

In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be initialized for the correct tire inflation pressure.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Functional requirement - 1

Each time you correct the pressure in a tire, or change a wheel or tire, the system must be reinitialized.

System limitations

The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn the driver of sudden, severe tire damage caused by external factors, nor can it identify the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of time.

In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:

▷ System has not been initialized
▶ Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
▶ Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
▶ Snow chains are attached

When the vehicle is driven with a space-saver spare tire*, page 193, the Flat Tire Monitor cannot function.

Initializing the system

MINI Convertible (2009) - Initializing the system - 1

The initialization is completed during driving, which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is continued automatically.

Do not initialize the system if you are driving with snow chains or a space-saver spare tire*.

Using the button in the turn indicator lever

  1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
  2. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

10:28 +74.0°F SET/INFO

  1. Press and hold the button until the display changes.

  2. Briefly press the button repeatedly until the corresponding symbol and "RESET" are displayed.

RESET

  1. Press and hold the button until the display changes.
  2. Start driving. Initialization is completed while the car is on the move, without any feedback.

Using the onboard monitor

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.

  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.

  3. Select "Settings".

Settings Audio Display settings Vehicle / Tires Language / Units Time / Date Bluetooth

  1. Select "Vehicle and tires".

  2. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "FTM".

Door locks → FTM → PDC 1. Correctly adjust pressure in all tires (also after a tire change). 2. Select "Reset" (only while stopped, with ignition on or engine on) Reset Status: active

  1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

  2. Select "Reset".

FTM 1. Correctly adjust pressure in all tires (also after a tire change). 2. Select "Reset" (only while stop- ped, with ignition on or engine on) Reset Status: active

  1. Select "Yes".
  2. Start driving.

The initialization is completed during driving.

Indication of a flat tire

MINI Convertible (2009) - Indication of a flat tire - 1

MINI Convertible (2009) - Indication of a flat tire - 2

The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. An acoustic signal also sounds. There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.

  1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. Check whether your vehicle is equipped with normal tires or Run-Flat Tires.

The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to Run-Flat Tires, page 173.

Normal tires

  1. Determine which tire is damaged.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Normal tires - 1

If this cannot be determined, contact your MINI Dealer.

  1. Repair the flat tire, refer to page 189, or change the damaged tire, refer to page 192.

Run-Flat Tires*

  1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph or 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Run-Flat Tires* - 1

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with Run-Flat Tires, 173, otherwise a serious accident result.

  1. At the next opportunity, check the air pressure in all four tires.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Run-Flat Tires* - 2

If all four tires are inflated to the correct pressures, the Flat Tire Monitor not have been initialized. The system then be initialized.

  1. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guidelines:

With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km
With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 94 miles/150 km
With a full load:
4 persons, load compartment full: approx. 30 miles/50 km

MINI Convertible (2009) - Run-Flat Tires* - 3

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h, otherwise an accident may occur. In the event of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics.

If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during the journey, this may be an indication that the

damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce the vehicle speed and stop as soon as possible. Otherwise, sections of the tire may come loose and cause accidents. Do not continue driving and contact your MINI Dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR TPM*

The concept

TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirement

In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be reset while all tire inflation pressures are correct.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Otherwise, the system may malfunction.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Functional requirement - 1

Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been ged, reset the system.

System limitations

MINI Convertible (2009) - System limitations - 1

TPM cannot warn you in advance of sudden severe tire damage caused by outside ences.

The system does not work correctly if it has not been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indicated even though the tire inflation pressures are correct.

The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire if a wheel without TPM electronics, such as a compact spare wheel*, has been mounted, or if TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio frequency.

Status indicator on the onboard monitor

The tire and system condition is indicated by the color of the tires.

TPM takes into account the fact that tire pressure changes while the vehicle is being driven. The tire pressure does not need to be corrected unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means of color indicators.

Green

The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the established target value.

"TPM active" is displayed on the onboard monitor.

One wheel yellow

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in the indicated tire. A message appears on the onboard monitor.

All wheels yellow

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in several tires. A message appears on the onboard monitor.

Gray

The system cannot detect a puncture.

Possible reasons for this:

TPM is being reset
Temporary malfunction caused by systems or devices using the same radio frequency
Malfunction

Resetting the system

MINI Convertible (2009) - Resetting the system - 1

Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reset the system.

Using the button in the turn indicator lever

  1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
  2. Briefly press the button in the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

10:28 +74.0°F SET/INFO

  1. Press and hold the button until the display changes.
  2. Repeatedly press the button briefly until the symbol for Tire Pressure Monitor and "ACTIVE" are displayed. The Tire Pressure Monitor can be reset using "RESET".

ACTIVE RESET

  1. Press and hold the button until "RESETTING" appears.

RESETING RESET

  1. Start driving. After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the tar-

get values to be monitored. The system reset is completed during your drive, and can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, the reset is continued automatically. The indicator lamp goes out after the system reset is completed.

Using the onboard monitor

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings" and press the MINI joystick.

Settings Display off Audio Display settings Vehicle / Tires Language / Units Time / Date Bluetooth

  1. Select "Vehicle and tires" and press the MINI joystick.

  2. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "TPM" and press the MINI joystick.

Door locks TPM PDC Status: TPM active

  1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
  2. Select "Reset" and press the MINI joystick.

  3. Select "Yes" and press the MINI joystick.

TPM Reset Reset TPM? Yes No Status: TPM active

  1. Start driving.

The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The system reset is completed during your drive, and can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, the reset is continued automatically. On the onboard monitor, the tires are shown in green and "Status: TPM active" is displayed again.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Using the onboard monitor - 4

If a flat tire is detected while the system is being reset and while it is determining the

inflation pressures, all tires on the onboard monitor are displayed in yellow. The message "Tire low!" is shown.

Message for low tire inflation pressure

MINI Convertible (2009) - Message for low tire inflation pressure - 1

The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the onboard monitor. An acoustic signal also sounds. There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.

  1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. Check whether your vehicle is equipped with normal tires or Run-Flat Tires.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Message for low tire inflation pressure - 2

The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the wall, page 173.

Normal tires

  1. Determine which tire is damaged.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Normal tires - 1

If this cannot be determined, contact your MINI Dealer.

  1. Repair the flat tire or change the damaged tire, refer to page 192.

Run-Flat Tires*

  1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Run-Flat Tires* - 1

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with Run-Flat Tires, othe a serious accident could result.

  1. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guidelines:

With a light load:

1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km

With a medium load:

2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 94 miles/150 km

With a full load:

4 persons, load compartment full: approx. 30 miles/50 km

MINI Convertible (2009) - Run-Flat Tires* - 2

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h, otherwise an accident may occur. In the event of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics.

If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during the journey, this may be an indication that the damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce the vehicle speed and stop as soon as possible. Otherwise, sections of the tire may come loose and cause accidents. Do not continue driving and contact your MINI Dealer.

Malfunction

MINI Convertible (2009) - Malfunction - 1

The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continuously; the larger warning lamp comes on in yellow.

On the onboard monitor, the tires are shown in gray and a message appears. No punctures can be detected.

This type of message is shown in the following situations:

▶ If there is a malfunction. Have the system checked.
▶ If a wheel without TPM electronics has been mounted.
If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio frequency.

Message for unsuccessful system reset

MINI Convertible (2009) - Message for unsuccessful system reset - 1

Both warning lamps come on in yellow. A message appears on the onboard monitor. The system is not reset after a tire has been changed, for example.

Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system, page 81.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems

Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat

and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure tell-tale illuminates.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

AIRBAGS

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components, likely indicating steering or navigation areas.

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:

MINI:

1 Front airbags
2 Side airbags in backrests
3 Head airbags at the front and rear

MINI Convertible:

1 Front airbags
2 Side/head airbags in the backrests

Protective effect

MINI Convertible (2009) - Protective effect - 1

Observe the instructions on page 42 to ensure the best possible personal protection.

The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side airbag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.

The side/head airbag in the MINI Convertible protects the head during impact.

The airbags are designed to not be triggered in every type of collision, e.g. not in minor accidents, certain rollover situations or rear impacts.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Protective effect - 2

Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or fy them in any other way.

Keep the dashboard and window on the passenger side free from obstruction, i.e. do not cover it with adhesive film or coverings, and do not affix any holders such as for a navigation device or a mobile phone.

Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other objects not specifically approved for seats with integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not

hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do not modify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the upholstered covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel.

Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns.

In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of airbag generators executed only by a MINI Dealer or a workshop that works according to repair procedures of the manufacturer of your MINI with correspondingly trained personnel and has the required explosives licenses. Otherwise, unprofessional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.

Warning notices and information about the airbags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags

An analysis of the impression in the front passenger seat cushion determines whether and how the seat is occupied. The front and side air bags for the front passenger are activated or deactivated by the system accordingly.

The indicator lamp above the interior rear-view mirror shows the current status of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Status of front passenger airbags below.

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety precautions and handling instructions under Transporting children safely, page 48.

The front and side airbags can also be deactivated by adolescents and adults sitting in certain positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the passenger should change his or her sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sitting position, transport the relevant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your MINI. Do not place any items under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Otherwise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not ensured.

Status of front passenger airbags

MINI:

PASS AIR BAG OFF

MINI Convertible:

PASSENGER BE AIR BAG OFF

The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags shows the functional status of the front passenger's front and side airbags in accordance with whether and how the front passenger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.

The indicator lamp comes on as intended when a child in a specially designated child-restraint system is detected on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the system. This particularly applies to child seats that were required by the NHTSA at the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After installing a child's seat, check that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags comes on. It indicates that the child's seat has been detected and that the front passenger airbags are deactivated.
The indicator lamp does not come on as long as a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are activated.
The indicator lamp does not come on if the seat is empty. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.

Operational readiness of airbag system
Close-up of a speedometer with a person silhouette and a magnified inset showing a person in motion (no text or symbols)

As of radio readiness, page 51, the warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.

Airbag system malfunction

The warning lamp does not come on when radio readiness or the ignition is switched on.
The warning lamp stays lit continuously.

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay, otherwise

there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.

MINI CONVERTIBLE: ROLLOVER PROTECTION SYSTEM

The rollover system is automatically activated during an accident or dangerous driving situation, during extreme tilt of the longitudinal axis, or during loss of ground contact. The roll bar located behind the rear seat headrest is projected within a fraction of a second.

In addition to the reinforced windshield frame, the rollover protection system ensures the necessary head clearance for all occupants of the vehicle.

Never block the travel path of the rollover protection system with any objects.

Always wear your safety belt, it protects you in a minor car accident and, depending on the severity of the accident, the seat belt tensioner and the multilevel airbag system will protect you.

Lowering

If the rollover protection system releases accidentally, have your MINI Service check it.

If the rollover protective system is extended, do not operate the convertible top.

Never attempt to modify the individual components or the electrical wiring of the rollover protective system.

Have the necessary work on the rollover protection system of your MINI only carried out by an authorized MINI Dealer.

Faulty repair may lead to the failure of the system or malfunctions.

Check the system regularly and in order to ensure a long service life of all functions, it is mandatory to maintain the service intervals, refer to page 65.

LAMPS

PARKING LAMPS/LOW BEAMS

0 1 2 3 MINI

0 Lamps off and daytime running lamps

1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control *, daytime running lamps and welcome lamps

When you open the driver's door with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off if the light switch is in position 0, 2 or 3.

Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch position 1.

Parking lamps

Turn the light switch to position 1.

The front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on.

Activation of lights on one side of the vehicle for parking, page 89.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Parking lamps - 1

The parking lamps will discharge the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time, otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the engine.

Low beams

Turn the light switch to position 2.

The low beams come on when the ignition is on.

Automatic headlamp control*

When the switch is in position 3, the low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation.

The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.

When driving into tunnels with bright overhead lights, there may be a delay before the head-lamps come on.

The low beams remain switched on independent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the fog lamps*.

If the daytime running lamps are activated, page 89, the low beams are always switched on with the light switch in position 3 and the ignition on. The exterior lamps are automatically switched off after the vehicle is parked.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Automatic headlamp control* - 1

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should respond to these kinds of low-visibility situations by switching the head-lamps on manually.

Welcome lamps

If you leave the light switch in the low beam or automatic headlamp control position when you switch off the ignition, the parking lamps and interior lamps come on for a certain time as soon as the vehicle is unlocked.

Pathway lighting

If you activate the headlamp flasher after switching off the ignition with the lamps switched off, the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time.

The setting is stored for the remote control in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

Setting the duration or deactivating the function

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".
  4. Select "Vehicle and tires".
  5. Select "Lighting".

Lighting — Door locks — Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps Pathway lighting 60 s

  1. Select "Pathway lighting".
  2. Turn the MINI joystick to select the corresponding duration.
  3. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.

Daytime running lamps*

The light switch can remain in the lamps off, parking lamps or automatic headlamp control* position.

In the lamps off position, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off after the vehicle is parked. In the parking lamps position, the parking lamps will stay on after the ignition is switched off.

Switch on the parking lamps separately if needed.

Activating/deactivating daytime running lamps

The setting is stored for the remote control in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".

  4. Select "Vehicle and tires".

  5. Select "Lighting".

Lighting — Door locks — Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps Pathway lighting 60 s

  1. Select "Daytime running lamps".

The daytime running lamps are switched on.

HIGH BEAMS/ROADSIDE PARKING LAMPS

1 2 3 1 MINI

1 Turn signal indicators/roadside parking lamps*
2 Switching on high beams
3 Switching off high beams/headlamp flasher

Roadside parking lamps, left or right*

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side for parking. Comply with local regulations when doing so.

Switching on

After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down, arrow 1.

The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time, otherwise the battery might not have enough power to start the engine.

Switching off

Press the lever up or down to the pressure point.

FOG LAMPS*

Diagram of a refrigerator interior showing labeled parts with arrows indicating movement or adjustment, likely for electronics or appliance labeling.

1 Fog lamps*
2 Rear fog lamp*

Press the respective switch to turn the lamps on/off.

MINI Convertible

Close-up of a mechanical device interior showing internal components and a magnified view of a component (no visible text or symbols)

Turn on fog lamps: Press the button upwards.
Turn on rear fog lamp: Press the button downwards.

When turning the lamps off, push the respective button again upwards or downwards.

Fog lamps*

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The green indicator lamp comes on when the fog lamps are switched on.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fog lamps are switched off when you activate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.

If the automatic headlamp control is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the fog lamps.

Rear fog lamp*

The low beams or parking lamps with fog lamps must be switched on. The yellow indicator lamp comes on when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING

You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are on.

Close-up of a car dashboard with a speedometer and circular dial indicator (no visible text or symbols)

Increasing brightness

Press and hold the button until the desired brightness is reached.

Reducing brightness

Press the button briefly.

The brightness decreases every time the button is pressed briefly.

INTERIOR LAMPS

The interior lamps, the footwell lamps* and the cargo bay lamp are controlled automatically.

To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside the car are switched off about 8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer to Start/stop button on page 51.

Switching interior lamps on/off manually
Diagram of a car interior showing a seatbelt with an upward arrow and a down arrow, no text or symbols present.

To switch the interior lamps on/off.

Press the switch.

To switch off the interior lamps permanently, press the button for about 3 seconds.

Reading lamps*
Diagram of a car interior showing directional arrows and internal components (no text or symbols)

To switch the reading lamps on and off. Press the switch.

Ambient lighting*
Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

The color of the ambient lighting can be changed.

▶ Press the switch forward.

The color changes in stages, ultimately to orange.

▷ Press the switch toward the rear.

The color changes in stages, ultimately to blue.

Intermediate settings and colors are possible.

CLIMATE

Diagram of car interior with numbered labels pointing to dashboard controls and air condition indicators

1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air to the upper body area Draft-free ventilation 94
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air flow rate, manual
5 Recirculated-air mode
6 AUTO program

7 Maximum cooling
8 Air distribution, manual
9 Setting the temperature
10 Defrosting windows and removing condensation
11 Manual cooling function
12 Rear window defroster
13 Windshield heating *

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

Comfortable interior climate

AUTO program 6 offers the ideal air distribution and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an interior temperature which is comfortable for you.

The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.

Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile settings on page 26.

Air flow rate, manual

MINI Convertible (2009) - Air flow rate, manual - 1

Press the – button to reduce air flow. Press the + button to increase it.

You can reactivate the automatic mode for the air flow rate with the AUTO button.

The air flow rate is lowered or switched off entirely to save on battery power. The display remains the same.

Switching the system on/off

Reduce the air flow by pressing the – button repeatedly until the system is switched off. All indicators go out.

Press the AUTO button to switch the automatic climate control back on.

AUTO program

MINI Convertible (2009) - AUTO program - 1

The AUTO program adjusts the air distribution to the windshield and

side windows, towards the upper body area and into the footwell for you. The air flow rate and your temperature specifications will be adapted to outside influences in accordance with seasonal changes, e.g. sunlight.

The cooling function is automatically switched on along with the AUTO program.

Convertible Program

If the soft top is open, the Convertible Program is activated. During the Convertible Program, the automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the soft top down. Furthermore, with increasing vehicle speed, the airflow is also increased.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Convertible Program - 1

If attaching the wind reflector, the performance of the Convertible Program can be

significantly improved.

Recirculated-air mode

MINI Convertible (2009) - Recirculated-air mode - 1

Recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off. The system then recirculates

the air currently within the vehicle.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Recirculated-air mode - 2

If condensation starts to form on the inside window surfaces, press the AUTO

button or switch off the recirculated-air mode and, if necessary, increase the air flow rate. The recirculated-air mode should not be used over an extended period of time, otherwise the air quality inside the car will deteriorate continuously.

Maximum cooling

MINI Convertible (2009) - Maximum cooling - 1

At outside temperatures above 32 °F /0 °C and when the engine is running, you obtain a maximum

cooling effect as soon as possible.

The automatic climate control goes into recirculated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air flows at maximum rate from the vents for the upper body area. You should therefore open them for maximum cooling.

Air distribution, manual

MINI Convertible (2009) - Air distribution, manual - 1

The flow of air is directed to the windows, to the upper body area or to the footwell as selected.

You can switch the automatic air distribution back on by pressing the AUTO button.

Temperature

MINI Convertible (2009) - Temperature - 1

Set the desired temperature individually. The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible regardless of the season, using maximum

cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.

If you switch between different temperature settings in quick succession, the automatic climate control does not have enough time to achieve the set temperature.

Rear window defroster

MINI Convertible (2009) - Rear window defroster - 1

The defroster is switched off automatically after a certain time.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the upper wires serve as an

antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

MINI Convertible (2009) - Defrosting windows and removing condensation - 1

Quickly removes ice and condensation from the windshield and front side windows.

For this purpose, also switch on the

cooling function.

The windshield heating* is switched on automatically.

Windshield heating*

MINI Convertible (2009) - Windshield heating* - 1

The windshield heating is switched off automatically after a certain time.

Cooling function

MINI Convertible (2009) - Cooling function - 1

When the cooling function is on, the air is cooled, dried, then reheated according to the temperature setting. This function is only

available while the engine is running.

The cooling function helps prevent condensation on the windows or removes it quickly.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started. The recirculated-air mode may be switched on automatically.

The cooling function is automatically switched on along with the AUTO program. The passenger compartment can only be cooled while the engine is running.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your MINI Dealer replaces this combined filter as a standard part of your scheduled maintenance.

You can call up further information in the service requirements display, page 65.

VENTILATION

1 2

1 Knob for continuous opening and closing

2 Jet for direction of air flow

Opening/closing

Turn the knob.

Direction of air flow

Swivel the entire jet.

PRACTICAL INTERIOR ACCESSORIES

INTEGRATED UNIVERSAL REMOTE CONTROL*

The concept

The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmitters for various remote-controlled devices, such as garage and gate openers and lighting systems. The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original handheld transmitters.

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three memory buttons 1. The system in question can then be operated by means of the programmed memory button 1. The LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the signal.

If you decide to sell your vehicle one day, in the interest of your own security, remember to clear the stored programs before the vehicle leaves your possession, page 96.

MINI Convertible (2009) - The concept - 1

To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated. Comply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter.

Checking compatibility

MINI Convertible (2009) - Checking compatibility - 1

If this symbol appears on the package or in the instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, you can assume that the radio remote control device will be compatible with the integrated universal remote control.

For additional information, please contact your MINI Dealer or call: 1-800-355-3515.

You can also obtain information on the Internet at:

www.MINI.com or

www.homelink.com

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Programming
Diagram of a car interior with labeled parts 1 and 2, showing dashboard and seat components.

1 Memory buttons

2 LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters

  1. Switch on the ignition, page 51.

  2. When starting operation for the first time: press both outer memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rapidly. All stored programs are cleared.

  3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 2 to 12 in/5 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Fixed-code hand-held transmitters - 1

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-uttons 1 depends on the system of the active original hand-held transmitter

  1. Simultaneously press the transmit key on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance.

  2. To program other original hand-held transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the system with the engine running or with the ignition switched on.

If the system fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmitter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly and then remains lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If it uses an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.

Alternating-code hand-held transmitters

To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the device to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization or programming of additional hand-held transmitters.

When programming hand-held transmitters that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:

MINI Convertible (2009) - Alternating-code hand-held transmitters - 1

Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.

  1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.
  2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
  3. Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
  4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for the next step 5.
  5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

Clearing stored programs

Press both outer memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes: All stored programs are cleared.

It is not possible to clear individual programs.

Reassigning individual programs

  1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 2 to 12 in/5 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the memory buttons 1 depends on the system of the respective original hand-held transmitter used.

  1. Press the desired memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control.
  2. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit key of the original hand-held transmitter and release both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step.

GLOVE COMPARTMENT

Opening
Mechanical component with arrows indicating downward motion, no visible text or symbols

Press the button to open the cover.

The light in the glove compartment comes on.

Closing

Fold cover up.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Closing - 1

To prevent injury in the event of an accident, close the glove compartment after use while the vehicle is being driven.

MINI Convertible: Locking

Use the integrated key to lock the remote control system, refer to page 26.

Ventilation*

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, it may be possible to ventilate the glove compartment.

Interior view of a car showing the intake manifold and a close-up of a plug with a circular connector (no text or symbols visible)

Opening

Rotate the switch in the direction of the arrow.

Closing

Rotate the switch in the opposite direction of the arrow until it is in the vertical position.

Depending on the temperature setting of the air conditioning or the automatic climate control, high temperatures may result in the glove compartment.

CENTER ARMREST*

Storage compartment

The center armrest between the front seats contains either a compartment or the cover for the mobile phone base plate* or the snap-in adapter*.

Close-up of a car seatbelt with white arrows indicating left and right motion (no text or symbols)

Opening

The cover slides along guide rails and can be opened fully by pushing it back and lifting it.

Closing

Push the cover forwards.

CONNECTION FOR EXTERNAL AUDIO DEVICE

You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio recordings over the vehicle loudspeakers.

1 AUX IN 2

▶ AUX-In port, refer to page 155
▶ USB-audio interface*, refer to page 156

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

In the vehicle interior

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you will find storage compartments in the doors, next to the rear seats and in the center console*. The map compartments in the MINI Convertible are located next to the rear seats.

Nets* are located in the passenger footwell and on the backs of the front seat backrests.

Storage compartment on the front passenger side*

Close-up of a car's front dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Opening

Briefly press the bottom edge of the cover.

Closing

Push the cover back into its original position.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Closing - 1

To prevent injury in the event of an accident, close the storage compartment after

use while the vehicle is being driven.

MINI Convertible

The storage compartment cannot be locked.

Clothes hooks

There are clothes hooks on the grab handles in the rear passenger compartment.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Clothes hooks - 1

Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks, otherwise they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.

CUP HOLDERS AND ASHTRAY*

Interior view of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

Cup holders

Two cup holders are located in the front of the center console, another is in the rear at the back of the center console.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Cup holders - 1

Do not place glass containers in the cup holders, as this increases the risk of injury the event of an accident.

Ashtray*

The ashtray is located in one of the cup holders in the center console.

Emptying

Remove the entire ashtray.

Lighter

Interior view of a car gear shift lever and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.

The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops back out.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Lighter - 2

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in areas could result in burns.

When leaving the car, always remove the key so

that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.

CONNECTING ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES

In your MINI, you can use electrical devices such as a flashlight, car vacuum cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at 12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets is available. Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Cigarette lighter socket

Remove the lighter* or cover from the socket.

Power socket in cargo bay

MINI
Close-up of a mechanical component with a close-up inset showing a circular opening (no text or symbols visible)

Pull out the cover.

MINI Convertible
Close-up of a car's front bumper with a white arrow pointing to a small black dot on the side (no text or symbols visible)

Pull out the cover.

Black and white photo of a building facade with diagonal lighting and star-shaped elements (no text or symbols)

Black-and-white photo of a highway with motion blur, no visible text or symbols

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

ENTERTAINMENT

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

THINGS TO REMEMBER WHEN DRIVING

BREAK-IN PERIOD

Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. Please follow the instructions below in order to achieve the optimal service life and economy of operation for your vehicle.

Engine and differential

Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do not exceed the following:

Gasoline engine

4,500 rpm or 100 mph/160 km/h

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kick-down mode.

After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually increased.

Tires

Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

GENERAL DRIVING NOTES

Close the tailgate

Drive the vehicle only when the tailgate is closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could penetrate the interior of the vehicle.

If special circumstances make it absolutely necessary to drive with the tailgate open:

  1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

  2. Switch off the recirculated-air mode and significantly increase the air flow rate of the automatic climate control, page 93.

Hot exhaust system

In all vehicles, extremely high temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to various sections of the exhaust system, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while parking, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of serious personal injuries and property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns.

Hydroplaning

When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge of water can form between tires and road surface. This situation, known as hydroplaning, can cause partial or complete loss of tire contact with the road surface, so that the car cannot be steered or braked properly.

The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining tread depth on the tires, refer also to Tread depth on page 172.

Driving through water

MINI Convertible (2009) - Driving through water - 1

Drive through water on the road only if it is not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only lking speed at the most. Otherwise, the le's engine, the electrical systems and the mission may be damaged.

Parking brake on inclines

MINI Convertible (2009) - Parking brake on inclines - 1

On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with the clutch; use the parking brake. Other-greater clutch wear will result.

For information on driving off using Hill Start Assist*, refer to page 78.

Braking safely

Your MINI is equipped with ABS. If you are in a situation which requires full braking, it is best to brake using maximum brake pressure. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

The pulsation of the brake pedal, together with the sound of hydraulic regulation, indicates that ABS is actively taking effect.

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that Then full braking force will be immediately available when it is needed.

Hills

MINI Convertible (2009) - Hills - 1

To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system, drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, all the way to first gear if necessary. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic transmission, page 54.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Hills - 2

Never drive with the clutch held down, with the transmission in neutral or with the engine switched off; otherwise, engine braking action will not be present or there will be no power assistance to the brakes or steering.

Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area around the pedals, otherwise pedal function could be impaired.

Corrosion on brake rotors

When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.

When the vehicle is parked

Condensation forms while the automatic climate control is in operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.

In the MINI Cooper S, the coolant pump may continue to run for some time after the engine is switched off. This will generate noise in the engine compartment.

CARGO LOADING

MINI Convertible (2009) - CARGO LOADING - 1

To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never over-

load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. The ultimate result can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.

MINI Convertible (2009) - CARGO LOADING - 2

Avoid fluid spills in the cargo bay as they could damage the vehicle.

MINI: Cargo bay

Cargo bay cover

MINI Convertible (2009) - Cargo bay cover - 1

Do not place any objects on the cover, otherwise they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in the case of braking or sudden swerving, or they may damage the cover.

When you open the tailgate, the cargo bay cover is raised.

To load bulky luggage, the cover can be removed.

  1. Unhook the lift straps from the tailgate.

  2. Pull the cover out of the holders toward the rear.

Top-down view of a car chassis with a highlighted structural component and arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Expanding the cargo bay

The rear set backrest is split. Both sides can be folded separately to expand the cargo bay.

Top-down view of a car trunk with two white arrows pointing to the side of the seat area (no text or symbols)

  1. Pull the lever.

  2. Fold rear seat backrests forward.

When folding the backrest back up, make sure that the seat's locking mechanisms engage properly. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around in the event of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the occupants.

Adjusting rear seat backrest*

Expand the cargo bay by raising the split rear seat backrests to a steeper angle.

Diagram showing a vehicle interior with labeled parts and directional arrows, including numbered annotations 1 and 2.

  1. Pull the lever, arrow 1, and fold the rear seat backrest forward.
  2. Fold up the lever of the backrest lock until it audibly engages, arrow 2.
  3. Fold back the backrest until it engages.

If the rear seat backrests are positioned at a steeper angle, do not install child-restraint systems in the rear of the vehicle as their protective features may be ineffective.

MINI Convertible: Luggage compartment

Do not place any objects on the luggage compartment roll-up cover, as this may damage the cover or the convertible top.

Loading aid

When the convertible top is closed, you can load the vehicle more easily by releasing the convertible top and folding it up.

  1. Release the convertible top using the handles, see arrows 1.

Diagram of car rearview showing three labeled parts with arrows indicating directional movement or assembly.

  1. Lift the convertible top, see arrow 2.
  2. Fold back the handles and place them on holders 3.

Expanding the luggage compartment volume

You can enlarge the luggage compartment volume when the convertible top is closed.

  1. Fold the convertible top upwards, refer to Loading aid

Diagram showing vehicle rearview with directional arrows and numbered labels indicating movement or positioning.

  1. Pull the luggage compartment's roll-up cover from its lower storage area and towards the rear, then swing upward, see arrows 1.
  2. Push cover into the upper storage areas, see arrows 2 and place down horizontally.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Expanding the luggage compartment volume - 2

To operate the convertible top, move the luggage compartment cover back to its

lower position.

Through-loading system

To be able to transport larger objects, the rear backrest can be folded down.

  1. If necessary, use the integrated key and open the backrest lock 1.
  2. Press button 2 and fold down backrest together with the belt strap.

3D anatomical illustration of a car wheel and arm (no text or symbols)

  1. Fold the backrest forward.

When folding the backrest back into its original position, always ensure that the catch engages securely. A loose backrest might fail to prevent cargo from entering the passenger compartment during sudden braking or evasive maneuvers, posing a potential hazard to occupants.

The belt guide loop, see page 45, must be closed.

Determining cargo limit

Close-up of a car interior showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading can result in damage to the vehicle and unstable driving conditions.

  1. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

  2. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

  3. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be four 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs: 1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
  4. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
  5. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

+ + + ≦ Max. Load + + ≦ Max. Load + + ≦ Max. Load + + ≦ Max. Load

The permissible load is the sum of the occupants' weights and the weight of the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.

Stowing cargo

Position heavy objects as low and as far forward as possible, ideally directly behind the rear seat backrests.
▶ Cover sharp edges and corners.
For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the respective opposite buckle.

Do not stack higher than the top edge of the backrests.

MINI
Two side-by-side illustrations of a car showing internal components and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

MINI Convertible
Two identical car side-by-side diagrams showing interior and exterior views of a person in a vehicle, with no text or symbols present.

Securing cargo
Interior view of a vehicle showing structural components and a close-up inset (no visible text or symbols)

▶ Secure smaller and lighter items using retaining or draw straps*.
Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your MINI Dealer. Four lashing eyes are provided for attaching the cargo straps. Two of them are located on the forward wall of the cargo bay.

Comply with the information enclosed with the load-securing devices.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Stowing cargo - 4

Always position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endan-

ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or swerves are necessary.

Do not exceed the approved gross weight and axle loads, page 205; otherwise the vehicle's operating safety is no longer assured and the vehicle will not be in compliance with the certification regulations.

Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car, since they could be thrown around, for example as a result of heavy braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occupants. Do not secure cargo using the fastening points for the tether strap, page 49; they may become damaged.

MINI: ROOF-MOUNTED LUGGAGE RACK*

A special rack system is available as an option for your MINI. Your MINI Dealer will be glad to advise you. Comply with the installation instructions supplied with the rack system.

Mounting points
Close-up of a car's side panel with a magnified inset showing a downward arrow (no text or symbols)

Remove the cover panel.

Loading roof-mounted luggage rack

Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.

You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 205.

The roof load must be distributed uniformly and should not be too large in area. Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom.

When loading, make sure that there is sufficient space for the movement of the glass sunroof and that no objects protrude into the swiveling area of the tailgate; otherwise damage can occur.

Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.

Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers, and take corners gently.

REAR LUGGAGE RACK*

A specially designed rear luggage rack is available for your MINI/MINI Convertible as optional accessory. Please read the in information provided in the assembly instructions.

Mounting points
Front view of a silver car with two white arrows pointing to the rear side (no text or symbols visible)

The mounting points can be found under the covers inside the bumper.

Push out the covers from the respective recesses.

Loading the rear luggage rack

When loading the rack, please ensure not to exceed the permissible roof load, the permissible gross vehicle weight, and the axle weight.

You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 205.

SAVING FUEL

Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors. The implementation of certain measures, your driving style and regular maintenance can have an influence on fuel consumption and on the environmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts no longer in use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof- or rear-mounted luggage racks whenever you are not using them.

Attached parts on the vehicle affect its aerodynamics and increase fuel consumption.

Check tire inflation pressure regularly

Check and, if necessary, correct tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip.

Low inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus leads to greater fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive off immediately

Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Think ahead while driving

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking by maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead.

Driving smoothly and anticipating impending traffic situations reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speeds

Use first gear only for driving off. In second and higher gears, accelerate smoothly to a suitable engine and road speed. In doing so, avoid high engine speeds and shift up early.

When you reach your desired traveling speed, shift to the highest suitable gear and drive at constant speed.

As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Coasting

When approaching a red traffic light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt in the highest suitable gear.

On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast in a suitable gear.

Fuel supply is shut off automatically when the vehicle is coasting.

Switch off the engine during lengthy stops

Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestions.

Have the vehicle serviced

Have your vehicle serviced regularly to achieve good economy and a long vehicle life. The manufacturer of your MINI recommends having the vehicle serviced by a MINI Dealer. Also note the MINI Maintenance System, page 179.

Nighttime aerial view of a complex highway interchange with illuminated light trails and surrounding urban buildings (no visible text or signage)

Nighttime aerial view of a complex highway interchange with illuminated light trails, surrounded by city lights and water (no visible text or signage)

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

ENTERTAINMENT

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Your navigation system can use satellites to ascertain the precise position of your vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter.

The navigation system requires a special navigation DVD. You can obtain the latest version from your MINI Dealer.

Inserting navigation DVD

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Use the lower drive for the navigation DVD.

  1. Press the button, arrow, and remove the cover.
  2. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled side up.
  3. To replace the cover, first insert it on the left and then press forward on the right until it snaps in.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard controls (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Wait for several seconds to allow the contents of the DVD to be read in.

Removing navigation DVD

Top-down view of a car dashboard with a control panel and indicator lights (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Press the button. The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

  2. Remove the DVD.

If the DVD is not ejected, the drive may be blocked. In this case, a message will appear on the Control Display.

Displaying arrow view in map display

When destination guidance is active, the arrow view can be displayed additionally on the right side of the map display.

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".
  4. Turn the MINI joystick until "Language / Units" is selected and press the MINI joystick.
  5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the MINI joystick until "Languages" is selected and press the MINI joystick.
  6. Select "Display arrow view" and press the MINI joystick.

Language Units Text language English US Navigation voice instructions Display arrow view

The arrow display is shown.

800 ft Palms BLVD 200ft

DESTINATION ENTRY

In entering your destination you can select from the following options:

▶ Entering a destination manually, see below
Entering a destination by voice commands*, page 117
Selecting destination using information, page 120
Selecting destination from a list, Destination list, page 121
▶ Selecting destination from address book, page 122
Storing home address, page 123

After selecting your destination you can proceed to start the destination guidance, page 126.

MINI Convertible (2009) - DESTINATION ENTRY - 1

Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. If you do not observe this precaution, you may be in violation of the law, and can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.

OPENING NAVIGATION

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Navigation" and press the MINI joystick.

Navigation Communication Entertainment Setup

  1. Select "Navigation".

Navigation — Car Data — Adi New destination SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY WA... CHESTNUT BRIDGE, WOODCLIFF Route preference ... Map facing north

The following information is displayed on the onboard monitor:

During destination guidance: the arrow or map view
When destination guidance is switch off: the destination list

ENTERING A DESTINATION MANUALLY

The system's word-matching principle makes it easier to enter the names of streets or towns, page 125. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored names can be called up quickly.

  1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field.

  2. Select "Navigation". "New destination" is highlighted.

  3. Press the MINI joystick.

Navigation... New destination SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY WA.. CHESTNUT BRIDGE, WOODCLIFF Route preference Map facing north

  1. Select "Enter address".

Enter address From address box State / Province: United STATES SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST Street House number Intersection

The system also supports you with the following features:

If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.
You can skip the entry of country and locality if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.

Selecting country

  1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed country. The list of available countries appears on the display.
  2. Select the country of destination.

Enter address ... State / Province: United STATES SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST Street House number Intersection

At least the town/city of the destination or its zip code must be entered in order to start the destination guidance.

Entering destination by town/city name

  1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/city.
  2. Select the first letter. A list of all towns/cities starting with this letter appears on the Control Display.

  3. Delete letters if necessary:

A...E...I...L...O...R...U Town / City: B BADGER, UNINC TULARE COUNTY BAKER, UNINC SAN BERNARDINO COU... BAKERSFIELD BALDWIN PARK

To delete individual letters: Move the MINI joystick to the right to highlight and press the MINI joystick.

To delete all letters: Move the MINI joystick to the right to highlight and press the MINI joystick for an extended period.

  1. If necessary, enter more letters. The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

To enter spaces, if necessary: Select the _symbol.

Town / City: BEVERLY BEVERLY, ESSEX, MA BEVERLY, RANDOLP, WV BEVERLY, GLEN, LOS ANGELES, CA BEVERLY, HILLS, LOS ANGELES, CA

  1. If necessary, change to the list of towns and cities and select a name.

BEVERLY BEACH BEVERLY HILLS (CALIFORNIA) BEVERLY HILLS (MICHIGAN) BEVERLY HILLS (MISSOURI) BEVERLY HILLS (TEXAS)

Entering destination by zip code

  1. Select "Town / City".
  2. Enter the zip code:

Select the digits individually.

To enter spaces, if necessary: Select the _symbol.

20 123 456 789 Town / City: 8

  1. Delete digits if necessary:

To delete digits individually: Move the MINI joystick to the right to highlight and press the MINI joystick.
To delete all digits: Move the MINI joystick to the right to highlight and press the MINI joystick for an extended period.

  1. Select the zip code.

The corresponding destination is displayed.

  1. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Select the town/city.

Entering street, house number and intersection

After the street you can also enter the intersection or the house number.

Entering street and intersection

  1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
  2. Enter the street.

The street is entered in the same manner as the town or city.

ABC L.R.STV.W.Z Street: A ABINGTON DR ACRES DR GREEN ALANDA PL ALDBURY CT

The intersection is entered in the same way as the street.

Entering a street without entering a town/city

You can also enter a street without specifying a town/city. In this case, all streets in the designated country are offered. The corresponding town/city is displayed after the street name.

  1. Turn the MINI joystick until "State / Province" or the displayed country is selected. The list of available countries appears on the display.
  2. Select the country of destination.
  3. Turn the MINI joystick until "Street" is selected.
  4. Select the first letter.

A list of all streets starting with this letter and of the associated towns/cities appears on the Control Display.

  1. If necessary, enter more letters. The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

ABC.L.R.STV.W.Z Street: A ABINGTON DR ACRES DR GREEN ALANDA PL ALDBURY CT

  1. Change to the list of street names and select the street name in the corresponding town/city.

Entering a house number

You can enter all house numbers that are stored for the street on the navigation DVD.

  1. Select "House number".
  2. To enter the house number: Select the digits individually.
  3. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Select the house number. You can only enter house numbers that are stored for the street on the navigation DVD.

Starting destination guidance with manual destination entry

@ Enter address ... BEVERLY HILLS REXFORD DRIVE 455 Intersection Start guidance

Select "Start guidance". Destination guidance starts immediately.
If you do not want to start destination guidance right away: Select "Add to destination list". The destination is stored in the destination list, page 121.

ENTERING A DESTINATION BY VOICE COMMANDS*

You can enter a desired destination via the voice activation system. During the destination input, you can switch between voice entry and entry via the onboard monitor at any time. To do so, reactivate the voice activation system if necessary.

You can have the possible commands read aloud via >Options<.

  1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

  2. Enter address

Enter address ... State / Province: United STATES SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST Street House number Intersection

Selecting country

  1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of destination.

  2. Say the name of the destination country.

Say the name of the destination country in the language of the voice activation system.

Entering destination

The destination can be spelled or entered as an entire word.

Spelling the destination

To enter a destination, spell it in the way it is commonly spelled in the destination country. Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.

  1. To spell the name of a town/city: Say at least the first three letters of the town/city. The more letters you say, the more accurately the system will recognize the town/city.

The system can suggest up to 20 destinations that meet your entries.

Up to 6 entries at a time appear on the Control Display.

1. BEVERLY BEACH 2. BEVERLY HILLS (CALIFORNIA) 3. BEVERLY HILLS (FLORIDA) 4. BEVERLY HILLS (MICHIGAN) 5. BEVERLY HILLS (MISSOURI) 6. BEVERLY HILLS (TEXAS)

MINI Convertible (2009) - Spelling the destination - 2

The system suggests a location.

  1. Select location:

To select highlighted town/ city: >Yes<
To select other town/city: >No<
To select an entry, e.g. >Entry 3<
To show other entries in the list: Next page
To respell the town/city: >Repeat

The town/city can also be selected from the list via the onboard monitor:

Turn the MINI joystick until the town/city is selected.

Entering the destination as an entire word

Towns/cities and streets located in the region where the language of the voice activation system is spoken can be entered as an entire word.

Example: to enter a U.S. destination as an entire word, the system language must be English.

A prerequisite is the use of a suitable navigation DVD.

Pronounce the words smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.

  1. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city of destination.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Entering the destination as an entire word - 1

  1. Say the name of the destination town/city.

The system can suggest up to 6 destinations that meet your entry.

1. BEVERLY BEACH 2. BEVERLY HILLS (CALIFORNIA) 3. BEVERLY HILLS (FLORIDA) 4. BEVERLY HILLS (MICHIGAN) 5. BEVERLY HILLS (MISSOURI) 6. BEVERLY HILLS (TEXAS)

MINI Convertible (2009) - Entering the destination as an entire word - 3

The system suggests a location.

  1. Select location:

To select highlighted town/ city: 'Yes'
To select other town/city: >No
To select an entry, e.g. >Entry 3<
To re-enter the town/city: >Repeat
To enter the town/city by spelling: >Spell<

The town/city can also be selected from the list via the onboard monitor:

Turn the MINI joystick until the town/city is selected.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Entering the destination as an entire word - 4

Identical-sounding towns/cities that cannot be distinguished by the system are

compiled in a separate list and shown as a destination followed by three dots.

If applicable, select this entry with 'Yes'. Then select the desired town/city from that list.

Entering street and house number

The street is entered in the same way as the destination town/city.

To enter the house number:

MINI Convertible (2009) - Entering street and house number - 1

  1. House number

  2. Say the house number.

House numbers of up to 4 digits can be entered. Say the house numbers as individual digits.

Starting destination guidance

MINI Convertible (2009) - Starting destination guidance - 1

Start guidance<

Destination guidance starts immediately.

Storing destinations

Destinations are added to the destination list or can be stored in the address book.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Storing destinations - 1

'Add to destination' or 'Add to address book'

MAP-GUIDED DESTINATION SELECTION

If you only know the location of the town or street of destination, you can enter the destination using a map. Select the destination on the map using cross-hairs and then transfer it for destination guidance.

  1. Select "Navigation".

"New destination" is highlighted.

  1. Press the MINI joystick.

Navigation... New destination SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY WA.. CHESTNUT BRIDGE, WOODCLIFF Route preference Map facing north

  1. Select "Input map".

book — Information — Input map State / Province Town / City Street House number Intersection

A section of a map is displayed on the Control Display:

During destination guidance, around the current destination
With the destination guidance deactivated, around the last destination entered

800 ft BLOSETT MOUSTON MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON ROAD MOUSTON Road MOUS…

  1. Select the destination using the cross-hairs.

To change the scale: turn the MINI joystick.
To move the map: move the MINI joystick in the corresponding direction. The MINI joystick can be moved to the left, right, forward and backward.

  1. Transfer the destination for destination guidance or store it: press the MINI joystick. The selected destination and other menu items are displayed.

6. Select the desired menu item:

"Start route guidance" starts destination guidance.
"Show current position" places your current position at the center of the map.
"Show destination position" places the current destination at the center of the map.
"Return to map" changes back to the "Input map".
Exit the menu.

Destination: BEVERLY HILLS. REXFOR Start route guidance Show current position Show destination position

The map for destination entry can also be called up in the map display: Select the symbol.

SELECTING DESTINATION USING INFORMATION

To have selected destinations, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, displayed, called up and transferred for destination guidance.

  1. Select "Navigation".
    "New destination" is highlighted.
  2. Press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Information".

From address book → Information On destination On location On a new destination

4. Select location:

▶ "On destination"
On location
▶ "On a new destination"

Information ... On destination On location On a new destination

  1. Press the MINI joystick.
  2. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and restaurants", and press the MINI joystick.
  3. If necessary, enter any search criteria, e.g. the maximum distance from your current location.
  4. Select "" and press the MINI joystick. Destinations are shown on the Control Display.
  5. Select a destination and press the MINI joystick.

SUNSET CAFE → 123 J. F. KENNEDY TPKE HO-HO-KUS NJ 02555 123-555-6789

The scope of information and symbols depends on the particular navigation DVD.

10. Select a menu item:

To transfer the address to the destination list and start destination guidance:

→ Select the symbol and press the MINI joystick.

To establish a telephone connection: Select the symbol and press the MINI joystick.
To display additional destinations: ◀▶Select the symbol and press the MINI joystick.
To start a new search: Select the symbol and press the MINI joystick.

Exiting the menu

←→ Select the arrow.

Symbols in map view

If you select the hotel category, for example, hotels appear on the map as symbols.

To hide the symbols in map view:

  1. Select the symbol and press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the MINI joystick.

The symbols are hidden.

To show the symbols:

Select "Show map icons" and press the MINI joystick.

Show map icons On destination BEVERLY HILLS On location On a new destination

To exit from the menu:

←→ Select the arrow.

DESTINATION LIST

The last 20 destinations entered into the system are shown in the destination list. These destinations can be called up and transferred for destination guidance.

Planning a longer route: all destinations that you wish to drive to can be stored in advance in the destination list, refer to Entering a destination manually on page 114.

Select "Navigation".

Navigation ... New destination →BEVERLY HILLS, REXFORD DRIVE. SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST. MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY WI- Route preference ... Map facing north ...

The destination last entered is listed first in the destination list.

→● This symbol indicates the current destination.

To show other destinations in the destination list:

turn the MINI joystick.

Transferring destination for destination guidance

  1. Select the desired destination from the destination list.
  2. Select "Start guidance".

Navigation Start guidance Add to address book Information on destination Delete entry Delete list Map facing north

Editing destination list

  1. Select the desired destination from the destination list.

  2. The selected destination can be edited:

To store the entry: Select "Add to address book".
To display information on the destination: Select "Information on destination".
To delete the entry: Select "Delete entry".
To delete all entries: Select "Delete list". The destination guidance is switched off.
To change an entry: Select "Edit". For operation, refer to Entering destination by town/city name, page 115.

ADDRESS BOOK

Opening address book

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

tion — Car Data — Address book D... J... P New address Home address DR. TOM JULIA PETER

Select "Address book".

Storing destinations in address book

You can store approx. 100 destinations in the address book.

  1. Select "Address book".
  2. Select "New address".

Address book D... J... P New address Home address DR. TOM JULIA PETER

  1. Select "Enter address".
  2. Enter the name and address, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 114.
  3. Select "Store in address book".

The entry is stored in the address book.

You can also store a destination from the destination list in the address book, page 121.

Storing current position*

The current position can be transferred to the address book.

  1. Select "Address book".
  2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the MINI joystick until "New address" is selected.

Address book D... J... P New address Home address DR, TOM JULIA PETER

  1. Select "Use current location as address". The name given can be changed. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 114.

  2. Select "Store in address book".

You can also enter your current position into the address book if you have left the area covered by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must enter a name.

Selecting destinations from address book

  1. Select "Address book".

The stored entries appear on the Control Display.

Address book D... J... P New address Home address DR. TOM JULIA PETER

  1. Select an entry.

Starting destination guidance

Select "Start guidance".

Address book Start guidance Edit address Delete address JULIA PETER

Changing destinations from address book

  1. Select "Address book".
  2. Select an entry.
  3. Select "Edit address".

Address book Start guidance Edit address Delete address JULIA PETER

  1. Change entry.

For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 114.

  1. Select "Store in address book".

Deleting individual destinations from address book

  1. Select "Address book".
  2. Select an entry.
  3. Select "Delete address".

Address book Start guidance Edit address Delete address JULIA PETER

  1. Select "Yes".

Deleting all destinations from address book

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".
  4. Select "Vehicle / Tires".
  5. Select "Delete data".

FTM — PDC — Delete data Delete address book

  1. Select "Delete address book".

  2. Select "Yes".

Home address

You can store your current position or the current destination as the home address in the address book. This entry occupies the second position in the address book.

Storing home address

  1. Select "Address book".
  2. Select "Home address".

Address book D... J... P New address. Home address DR, TOM JULIA, PETER

  1. Select "Use current location as address" or select "Save current destination" during destination guidance.

Using home address as destination

  1. Select "Home address".
  2. Select "Start guidance".

Changing the home address

  1. Select "Home address".
  2. Select "Edit address".

For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 114.

ROUTE SELECTION

You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like during destination entry or during destination guidance.

The route is planned according to fixed rules. The type of road is taken into account, e.g. whether it is a highway or a winding road. The road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a result, the routes recommended by the navigation system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal experience.

Changing route criteria

  1. Select "Navigation".
  2. Select "Route preference".

Navigation ... New destination BEVERLY HILLS, REXFORD DRIVE SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY W/ Route list — Route preference — New Map facing north ...

The various criteria are listed on the Control Display.

3. Select a route criterion for the route:

▶ "With highways"

Highways and major traffic arteries are given priority.

"Avoid highways"

Highways are avoided as far as possible.

▶ "Fast route"

Fast route, being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads.

"Short route"

Short route, irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be.

The route criterion is selected.

With highways Avoid highways Fast route Short route Dynamic route Avoid tollroads

4. Select any additional criteria for the route, if necessary:

"Dynamic route"

Automatic rerouting due to traffic obstructions. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic

obstruction, the guided route may lead through the traffic obstruction.

"Avoid tollroads" Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.
"Avoid ferries" Ferries are avoided as far as possible.

The route criterion is selected.

The route criteria can also be changed in the arrow or map view:

Select the corresponding symbol.

If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid tollroads" or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are selected, route calculation may take considerably longer.

Exiting the menu

←→ Select the arrow.

WORD-MATCHING PRINCIPLE

The system's word-matching principle makes it easier to enter the names of towns or streets. The system runs ongoing checks, comparing your destination entries with the data stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for instant response. The benefits for you include:

Names of towns entered may differ from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another country.

Example:

Instead of the German spelling "München" you can also enter the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".

When you are entering the names of towns and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous identification.

The system offers only those letters for selection of name entries that are stored on the navigation DVD. Thus, entry of erroneous or unregistered names is impossible.

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "Navigation".
  2. Select the destination from the destination list or enter a new destination, page 114.

Navigation... New destination SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY WA., CHESTNUT BRIDGE, WOODCLIFF Route preference Map facing north

  1. Select "Start guidance".

TERMINATING/CONTINUING DESTINATION GUIDANCE

In the arrow or map view

Select the → symbol.

0.2 mls

In the destination list

→● This symbol indicates the current destination.

  1. Select the current destination.

Navigation Start guidance Add to address book Information on destination Delete entry Delete list Map facing north

After the route has been calculated, destination guidance is indicated by arrows or a map on the Control Display.

The destination guidance can also be started in the arrow or map view:

Select the symbol.

At any time during destination guidance, you can operate other equipment items via the onboard monitor. You will be notified in time of any necessary change of direction by means of spoken instructions and the display of the direction arrows.

Navigation... New destination SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY WA.. CHESTNUT BRIDGE, WOODCLIFF Route preference Map facing north

  1. Select "Stop guidance".

Navigation Stop guidance Add to address book Information on destination Delete entry Delete list Map facing north

If you did not reach the destination before the end of the last journey, the following question will appear in the display at the start of the next

journey:

"Continue guidance to destination?".

The destination guidance starts automatically after a short time.

Starting destination guidance immediately

Select "Yes".

ROUTE DISPLAY

You have the option of displaying various views of the route during destination guidance.

Displaying arrow view

  1. Select "Navigation".
  2. Select "Arrow display".

Navigation ... New destination → BEVERLY HILLS, REXFORD DRIVE, SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST. MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY W/ Route preference ... active → Arrow display → Current pc

The arrow display is shown.

1 2 3 4 5 6 Beverly Hills Palms 8LVD 0.8 mls 7 8 SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET

1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Manually calling up traffic information * Symbol with red border: traffic information is available for the planned route
3 Selecting route criteria
4 Starting/stopping destination guidance

5 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
6 Distance to the next change of direction
7 Direction of travel

Outline of an arrow: Destination guidance on the calculated route
Solid arrow: Arrow points as the crow flies to the calculated route whenever the vehicle is not in an area recorded on the navigation DVD, e.g. in a parking garage.

8 Current location

The status line displays the estimated time of arrival and the distance to the destination.

The arrows change appearance before a change of direction.

Beverly Hills Palms BLVD 0.2 mls SANTA BARBARA MONTERREY STREET

1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance to change of direction
3 Change of direction

Exiting the menu

←→ Select the arrow.

Displaying map view

You can have your current position displayed on a map. After starting the destination guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.

  1. Select "Navigation".
  2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Select the desired map view:

"Map facing north"
"Map direction of travel"
"Perspective"

Navigation ... New destination → BEVERLY HILLS, REXFORD DRIVE SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY W/ Route preference ... Of travel — Perspective — Arrow display

Display
800 ft i → • - + 1 2 3 4 KUMPORT ALCO NEW CARRI OR RICHARD OR REDUCE OR BUNNTON WAY 5 Lloyd PL N DOLLWAY OR BURNTON WAY

1 Displaying the menu in which the information last selected can be shown/hidden, refer to Selecting destination using information, page 120
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Map-guided destination selection
4 Switching voice instructions on/off
5 Arrow to destination as the crow flies

800 ft 1 2 3 4 BROCKLAND N. CAYON LE MILKOTA RIVE WELDER P. LLOYD PL BURTON WAY BHARTHORN

1 Changing map view

▶ "Map facing north"
▶ "Map direction of travel"
Perspective"

2 Manually calling up traffic information * Symbol with red border: traffic information is available for the planned route

3 Changing route criteria:

▶ Prefer highways
Avoid highways
▶ Fast route
Short route

4 Arrow to destination as the crow flies

Exit the menu:

←→ Select the arrow.

The status line displays the estimated time of arrival and the distance to the destination.

At scales of less than 250 miles or 500 km, you have the option of deciding whether to orient the map to north, toward your current direction of travel, or show the map in perspective. At scales of 250 miles or 500 km or greater, the map always points toward north.

Changing map view

MINI Convertible (2009) - Changing map view - 1

Select the corresponding symbol.

The next map view is displayed.

Changing the scale

  1. In the map view, change to the top left field.
  2. Turn the MINI joystick to change the scale.

Displaying towns/cities and streets along the route

You can have the roads and towns along the route displayed during destination guidance. The distances remaining to be traveled within each section of the route are also shown.

  1. Select "Navigation".
  2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Select "Route list".

Navigation ... New destination → BEVERLY HILLS, REXFORD DRIVE, SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY W/ Route list — Route preference — Ne Map facing north ...

Exiting the menu

←→ Select the arrow.

DESTINATION GUIDANCE THROUGH VOICE INSTRUCTIONS

Switching voice instructions on/off

The voice instructions can be switched on/off in the arrow or map view:

  1. Change to the top right field.
  2. Select the symbol.

800 ft SUSCH 7 POTELVER NILLIAM ST. ANGELON ROBERT DR. MILKERY RVE DRAGON Lloyd PL NEDDARUT OR BUTTERSON WIFE

Switching voice instructions on/off at any time

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".

info sources — Settings Display settings Vehicle / Tires Language / Units Time / Date Traffic Info settings Bluetooth

  1. Select "Language / Units".
  2. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "Language".

Language Units Text language English US Navigation voice instructions Display arrow view

  1. Select "Navigation voice instructions".
    √ The voice instructions are switched on.

Adjusting volume for voice instructions

The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.

  1. Repeat the last voice instruction if necessary.
  2. Turn the button during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.

Top-down view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

CHANGING A ROUTE

Taking detours

During destination guidance, you can revise the navigation system's route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the number of miles/kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route.

  1. Select "Navigation".
  2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Select "New route".

Navigation ... New destination → BEVERLY HILLS, REXFORD DRIVE. SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY W/ Route preference → New route Map facing north ...

A detour can be made around a specified section of the total route length.

  1. Turn the MINI joystick to enter the desired number and press the MINI joystick.

The route is recalculated.

Exiting the menu without changing the route

←→ Select the arrow.

TRAFFIC INFORMATION*

In many metropolitan areas you can receive traffic information broadcast by radio stations. The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic control centers and the traffic information is updated periodically.

During destination guidance, the traffic information relevant to the route you are planning to take is automatically shown and taken into account in route planning. Irrespective of whether destination guidance is active, you can have the traffic information displayed in the map display or as an event list.

Switching reception of traffic information on/off

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.

  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.

  3. Select "Settings".

info sources — Settings Display settings Vehicle / Tires Language / Units Time / Date Traffic Info settings Bluetooth

  1. Select "Traffic Info settings".

Settings Audio Display settings Vehicle and tires Language / Units Time / Date Traffic Info settings

  1. Select "Traffic Info".

Traffic Info Traffic Info AUTO (LOCAL-1) KBIG 104 LOCAL-1

√ The traffic information can be received and displayed.

"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info station with the best reception.

Depending on the station, either the station name, frequency, local number or other information is displayed.

Calling up traffic information manually

During destination guidance

During destination guidance, traffic information can be called up manually in the arrow or map display.

If the symbol is shown with a red border, there is traffic information regarding the planned route.

  1. Change to the top right field.
  2. Select the symbol.

800 ft N Lloyd PL MILTON RD N CARRICK OH BROCK DR BLOKCHIN PA SUNETOWN WAY

During destination guidance, traffic information items along the planned route are indicated by yellow diamonds.

Information — Traffic Info US-9 SOUTHBOUND 3,8 mls US-9 NORTHBOUND 49 mls

Traffic information on the planned route is shown first, sorted by distance from the vehicle's current position.

With destination guidance switched off

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Navigation" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Traffic Info".

Information — Traffic Info US-9 SOUTHBOUND 3.8 mls US-9 NORTHBOUND 49 mls

Traffic information on the planned route is shown first, sorted by distance from the vehicle's current position.

Displaying traffic information in map view

In map view, the traffic information icons are shown up to a scale of 100 miles or 200 km.

The highlighting of the stretch corresponding to the traffic report and the icons for the type of event as described below are displayed and hidden. This depends on the selected scale.

Displaying detailed traffic information

Select a traffic information item from the list.

between:1-95/Exit 10 and:US-1/Exit 8 in:3.8 mls delay:35min. stopped traffic

Exiting the menu

MINI Convertible (2009) - Displaying traffic information in map view - 2

Select the arrow.

Traffic information icons

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 1

Traffic event displayed with map scales larger than 5 miles/10 km; arrow points in the relevant direction of travel.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 2

There are several traffic events. Switch to a smaller map scale to show more detail.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 3

Traffic light failure

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 4

Roadworks

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 5

General traffic obstruction Transport of hazardous load Vehicle on wrong carriageway

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 6

Danger

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 7

Low clearance

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 8

No parking

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 9

Fog

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 10

Heavy rain

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 11

Slippery road

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 12

Cross winds

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 13

Smog

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 14

Road closed

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 15

Slow traffic

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 16

Traffic backup

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 17

Stopped traffic

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 18

Icy roads

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 19

Uneven surface

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 20

Accident

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 21

Lane closure

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 22

Delay

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 23

Police checkpoint

1/4 mls NILLIAM WICHIGLEY MILKON ST. NEW YORK BUNTON WAY ELOYD PL N DOWHYTZE BURSTON T BURSTON T BURSTON T

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 25

Slow traffic or other traffic event

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 26

Stop-and-go traffic

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 27

Stopped traffic

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traffic information icons - 28

Traffic event in both directions of travel

Traffic information during destination guidance

System response will vary depending on whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected, refer to page 124.

Displaying traffic obstructions

When the navigation system receives a traffic obstruction message and "Dynamic route" is not selected, you will be shown certain information, such as the length of the traffic congestion, when you are approx. 25 miles/40 km away from the traffic obstruction.

The last possible detour exit is indicated just before you reach it.

US-9 stopped traffic in: 3 mls Length: 2.0 mls delay: 36min. Detour

This information is displayed even if you have called up another application on the Control Display.

Dynamic route planning

When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route will be changed automatically in the event of a traffic obstruction. The system will not point out traffic obstructions on the original route. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the newly calculated route may still lead through the traffic obstruction.

DISPLAYING CURRENT POSITION

You can have your current position displayed even when the destination guidance is switched off.

  1. Select "Navigation".
  2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Select "Current position".

Navigation ... New destination → BEVERLY HILLS, REXFORD DRIVE... SANTA BARBARA, MONTERREY ST. MARINA DEL REY, ADMIRALTY WA. Route preference ... Arrow display—Current position—

The current position of your MINI is displayed. If the navigation system is unable to identify a town or city, your current map coordinates will appear.

Exiting the menu

←→ Select the arrow.

You can also have your current position displayed on a map, page 127.

WHAT TO DO IF ...

What to do if ...

a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruction to insert the DVD appears on the Control Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the correct DVD for the navigation system. This information is indicated on the DVD label.

you request the current position of your vehicle, but do not receive a precise display? The system is unable to receive enough GPS signals at your current position due to obstructions, your current position is not yet available on your navigation DVD, or the system is in the process of calculating your current position. As a rule, reception is guaranteed when you are in the open.

the destination guidance does not accept a destination?

The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.

the destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name?

On the navigation DVD, no downtown area can be determined for the city or town entered. Enter any street, or a destination such as the railway station in the selected town, and then start the destination guidance.

you want to enter a destination for the destination guidance, but it is not possible to select the letters for your desired entry?

The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this case, the system will not offer you any letters to choose from. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.

the system stops furnishing directions on which way to turn as you approach intersections?

You are driving in an area that has not yet been completely recorded on the navigation DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a turn,

you will see an arrow which indicates the general direction of your planned route. Or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new recommended route.

the navigation system does not react to entries?

If the battery was disconnected, it takes about 10 minutes before the system is once again operational.

Black and white photo of a hand reaching toward a window, no visible text or symbols

Black-and-white photo of a person operating a handheld electronic device (no visible text or symbols)

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

ENTERTAINMENT

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

ON/OFF AND SETTINGS

The following audio sources have shared controls and settings options:

Radio
CD player
CD changer*

CONTROLS

The audio sources can be operated using:

▶ Buttons near the CD player
Onboard monitor
▶ Buttons on steering wheel, page 11

Buttons near the CD player
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Drive for audio CDs
2 Eject CD
3 Station scan/track search

Change radio station.
Select track for CD player and CD changer.

4 Sound output for entertainment on/off, volume

▷ Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on the unit, the radio station or track set most recently is played.
Turn: adjust volume.

5 Change audio source
6 Change FM/AM frequency

Operation via onboard monitor

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Entertainment" and press the MINI joystick.

| Station | Value | | :--- | :--- | | FM | 103.5 | | AM | 99.3 | | CD | 94.3 | | AUX | 97.5 | All stations ... 94.3

You have the following choices:

▶ "FM" and "AM": radio reception
"HD radio": High Definition Radio*
▶ "SAT": satellite radio*
▶ "CD": CD player or changer
▶ "AUX": AUX-In port, USB-audio interface*

The selected audio source is stored for the remote control currently in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

SWITCHING ON/OFF

Entertainment audio output
Top-down view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air vent (no visible text or symbols)

Press the button.

This symbol at the lower edge of the Control Display indicates that the audio output has been switched off.

ADJUSTING VOLUME

Top-down view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

Turn the knob to the desired volume.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, page 11.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

TONE CONTROL

You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase.

The tone settings are applied to all audio sources.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

Changing tone settings

  1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.

  3. Select "Settings".

  4. Select "Audio".

Settings Audio Display settings Vehicle / Tires Language / Units Time / Date Traffic Info settings

Treble and bass

  1. Select "Treble / Bass".

Treble / Bass — Balance / Fair Treble Bass

  1. Move the MINI joystick to the left or right to select "Treble" or "Bass".
  2. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired setting is reached.

Balance and fader

You can adjust the volume distribution in the same manner as "Treble / Bass".

▶ "Balance": left/right volume distribution
▶ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Speed-dependent volume control

The speed-dependent volume control automatically increases the volume with increasing driving speed. You can set various stages for the increase in volume.

  1. Select "Speed volume".

Speed/Fader → Speed volume → Re Speed-dependent volume min. max.

于发行公司前

  1. Turn the MINI joystick:

The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.

Resetting tone settings

You can reset all tone settings to the default setting.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".
  4. Select "Audio".
  5. Select "Reset".

under — Speed volume — Reset Treble Bass

7月29日停牌

  1. Select "Yes".

RADIO

Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM wavebands.

Press the button if the sound output is switched off.

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

  1. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Entertainment" and press the MINI joystick.
  2. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "FM" or "AM".

| Station | Value | | :--- | :--- | | FM | 103.5 | | AM | 99.3 | | CD | 94.3 | | AUX | 97.5 | All stations ...

Stations are shown on the Control Display on the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "All stations".

If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM waveband or if the displayed stations are no longer receivable, you can update the stations with the best reception, page 142.

Changing stations

| Station | Value | | :--- | :--- | | FM ... | 103.5 | | All stations ... | 99.3 | | KLDS | 94.3 | | KROD | 97.5 | | Point Label | 94.3 |

Turn the MINI joystick.

Buttons on the CD player

Press the button for the corresponding direction.

The system switches to the next displayed station.

You can also change the station using buttons on the steering wheel, page 11.

Changing selection criteria

In addition to the stations currently displayed, you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed.

You can choose from the following selection criteria:

"All stations"*:

Stations that can currently be received in the "FM" waveband.

"Autostore":

Stations with the best reception in the "AM" waveband.

For High Definition Radio: stations with the best reception in the "FM" waveband.

▷ "Presets":

Stations you stored previously, page 143.

▷ "Manual":

To set stations that can be received in addition to those already being displayed, refer to Selecting the frequency manually, page 142.

Changing the selection criterion

  1. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.
  2. Select the selection criterion.

FM... Manual - Presets - All stations - 1 103.5 1 103.5 2 99.3 3 WNYC 4 94.5 5 KLOS

Sampling stations, scan

The displayed stations in the current waveband are automatically sampled in succession.

  1. Select "FM" or "AM".
  2. Select the selection criterion.
  3. Press the MINI joystick. Other menu items are displayed.
  4. Select "Scan".

FM ... Presets RDS Store Tone Scan CLASSIC GONG9 CHART RADIO JAZZ RADIO

The stations are sampled.

Stop sampling:

  1. Press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Scan" again.
    Station sampling is interrupted and the selected station stays on.

Buttons on the CD player

☐ No sample stations, press the button for the corresponding direction for an extended time.

Press the button again to end the procedure.

Selecting the frequency manually

With "Manual" you can select stations that can be received in addition to those displayed.

  1. Select "FM" or "AM".
  2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.
  3. Select "Manual".

FM ... Manual — Presets — All stations - 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 102 104 106 108 95.5 FM

  1. Turn the MINI joystick to set a certain frequency.

Updating stations with best reception

If on a longer journey you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received, you can update the list of stations with the best reception in the AM waveband.

  1. Select "AM".
  2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.
  3. Select Autostore, e.g. "Autostore".

| Date | Value | | ---------- | ------ | | 1 | 11690 | | 2 | 21470 | | 3 | 3960 | | 4 | 41480 | | 5 | 5760 |

  1. Press the MINI joystick. Other menu items are displayed.

  2. Select "Autostore".

AM ... Autostore ... Autostore Store Tone Scan 2 1470 5 960 4 1480 5 760

The display of the stations with the strongest reception is updated. The frequencies of the stations are displayed.

STORING STATIONS

  1. Select "FM" or "AM".

  2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.

Select the desired selection criterion.

  1. Select the desired frequency or station.

| Station | Frequency (FM) | | ------- | -------------- | | 88 | 90 | | 90 | 92 | | 92 | 94 | | 94 | 96 | | 96 | 98 | | 98 | 100 | | 100 | 102 | | 102 | 104 | | 104 | 106 | | 106 | 108 | | 108 | 95.5 |

  1. Press the MINI joystick.

Other menu items are displayed.

  1. Select "Store".

FM ... Manual ... RDS Store Tone Scan 98 100 102 104 106 108 95.5 FM

"Presets" is displayed.

  1. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired memory location is selected.

The number of the memory location appears beside the name or frequency of the station.

| Current Value | Label | | ------------- | --------- | | 1103.5 | 1 | | 103.5 | 2 | | 103.5 | 3 WNYC | | 103.5 | 4 KLOS | | 103.5 | 5 KLOS |

  1. Press the MINI joystick.

The station is stored.

The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed again after a short time.

The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

Changing a memory location

  1. Select "Presets".

  2. Select the desired station.

  3. Press the MINI joystick.

Other menu items are displayed.

  1. Select "Store".

FM ... Presets ... RDS Store Tone Scan 2 99.3 3 WNYC 4 94.3 5 KLOS NAR178 EA

  1. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired memory location is selected.

The number of the memory location appears beside the name or frequency of the station.

  1. Press the MINI joystick.

The station is stored.

RADIO DATA SYSTEM RDS

Radio stations in the FM waveband can broadcast additional information, e.g. the station name, using RDS. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. Where reception is poor or in the event of interference, it may take some time before the station names will appear in the display.

Switching RDS on/off*

  1. Select "FM".
  2. Press the MINI joystick.
    Other menu items are displayed.
  3. Select "RDS".

FM ... Presets RDS Store Tone Scan 2 103.5 3 99.3 5 94.3 4 WNYC

RDS is activated.

The setting is stored for the remote control in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

HD RADIO*

Many stations broadcast both analog and digital signals. If a digital radio network is available, these stations can be received digitally and thus with better sound quality.

Licence conditions

HD Radio TM technology manufactured under licence from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio TM and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Switching digital radio reception on/off

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the ... button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Setup" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "Settings".

info sources — Settings Display settings Vehicle / Tires Language / Units Time / Date Traffic Info settings Bluetooth

  1. Select "Audio".
  2. Change to the topmost field. Select "HD radio".

eed volume - ● HD radio - Reset - Off

  1. Select "Off".
    ☐ Digital station reception is now switched on.

H) This symbol is displayed in the status line when a station is received digitally.

| Value | | --------- | | 103.5 | | 1103.5 | | 2.99.3 | | 3 WNYC | | 4.94.3 | | 5 KLOS |

Some stations do not transmit the digital and analog signals simultaneously. If you are in an area in which digital reception of the selected station is not possible continuously, reception

will alternate between analog and digital. This can cause repetitions or interruptions. In this case it may be preferable to switch off digital reception.

Selecting programs of a digital station*

Some stations broadcast several programs on a single frequency. To select one of these programs:

  1. Select "FM" or "AM".

FM ... Presets ... 1 103.5 1 103.5 3 WNYC 4 94.3 5 KLOS 2 99.3

  1. Select "Manual".
  2. Select a station that can be received digitally.

H) This symbol is displayed in the status line when a station is received digitally.

  1. Change to the next program of the digital station using the buttons on the radio or steering wheel.

Updating digitally receivable stations

If on a longer journey you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received, you can update the list of stations received with the strongest signals.

  1. Select "FM" or "AM".
  2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.

  3. Select "Autostore".

| Item | Value | |---|---| | Manual Presets | 11690 | | Presets | 11690 | | Presets | 21470 | | Presets | 5960 | | Presets | 41480 | | Autostore | 5760 |

  1. Press the MINI joystick. Other menu items are displayed.
  2. Select "Autostore"

AM ... Autostore ... Autostore Autostore HD Store Tone 2 1470 $ 960 4 1480 5 760

The display of the digitally receivable stations is updated. This can take up to 2 minutes.

Displaying additional information

With digital stations, additional information on the current track can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.

  1. Select a station.
  2. Select "Details".

FM ... Presets Store Tone Scan Details CLASSIC GONG9 CHART RADIO JAZZ RADIO

The information is displayed.

When you change to another digitally received station, any additional information is displayed after a brief interruption.

SATELLITE RADIO*

You can receive over 100 different channels with high sound quality.

The channels are offered to you in predefined packages. To receive the channels of your choice, you must have the corresponding packages enabled.

MINI Convertible (2009) - SATELLITE RADIO* - 1

With this new technology, signal losses can occur from time to time and result in interruptions.

Enabling or disabling channels

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the ... button. This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Entertainment" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "SAT".

| Station | Value | | ------- | ----- | | FM | 105.5 | | AM | 99.3 | | SAT | 94.3 | | CD | 94.3 | | AUX | 97.5 |

  1. Press the MINI joystick.

SAT ... All channels ... CH 001 Channel A CH 002 Channel B CH 003 Channel C CH 004 Channel D CH 005 Channel E

The channels are displayed. √ These channels are enabled.

Enabling

  1. Select a channel that has not yet been enabled.

A phone number and the electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Enabling - 1

The electronic serial number is required to enable or disable a chan-

  1. To enable the channel: Dial the phone number.

Disabling

  1. Select an enabled channel.

SAT ... All channels ... Details 001 Channel A Store 002 Channel B Tone 003 Channel C ESN 004 Channel D 005 Channel E

  1. Select "ESN". The electronic serial number, ESN, is displayed.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Disabling - 2

The electronic serial number is required to disable a channel.

  1. To disable the channel: Dial the phone number.

Selecting and storing a channel

  1. Select "SAT".

FM—AM—SAT—CD—AUX Categories Pop Jazz Country Latin Pop

Channels are shown on the Control Display, sorted on the basis of selection criteria.

2. Select a menu item:

"Presets": Up to twelve channels you previously stored.
▶ "All channels": All channels are displayed.
"Categories": All channels, sorted by categories, e.g. news, jazz.

SAT ... Categories - Presets - All chan Rock Jazz Country Latin Pop

3. Press the MINI joystick.

  1. If "Categories" has been selected: Select the desired category.

SAT ... Categories Pop Jazz Country Latin Pop

The channels of this category are displayed.

  1. Select a channel marked with this symbol.

Jazz CH 001 Channel A CH 002 Channel B CH 003 Channel C CH 004 Channel D CH 005 Channel E

  1. Press the MINI joystick. The selected station is played.

Additional information

  1. Select a channel.
  2. Select "Details".

Jazz Details Store Tone ESN Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D CHOS Channel E

The name of the channel and additional information on the current track are displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.

Storing a channel

  1. Select the desired channel.
  2. Press the MINI joystick. Other menu items are displayed.
  3. Select "Store".

SAT ... All channels ... Details Store Tone ESN 001 Channel A 002 Channel B 003 Channel C 004 Channel D 005 Channel E

"Presets" is displayed.

  1. Turn the MINI joystick to select the memory location and press the MINI joystick.

SAT ... Presets ... 01 Channel A 02 Channel B 03 Channel C 04 Channel D 05 Channel E

The channel is stored. The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed again after a short time.

Changing channels with buttons next to CD player

press the button for the corresponding direction.

The system switches to the next enabled channel.

Notes

When more than 4 seconds go by and no signal is received, a message appears on the Control Display.

Under some circumstances, e.g. depending on environmental or topographic conditions, it may not be possible to receive any signal. The satellite radio has no influence on this. Signal may be unavailable in tunnels or underground garages, next to high-rise buildings, in the vicinity of trees, mountains or other strong sources of radio interference.

Reception usually resumes as soon as the signal becomes available again.

CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER*

LISTENING TO CDS

Compressed audio files*

CDs with compressed audio files, MP3s, can be played by the CD player and CD changer.

Starting the CD player

The upper drive is for audio CDs.

Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side up.

The CD is drawn in automatically. Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. When playing CDs with compressed audio files, it can take the CD player approx. 1 minute to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.

Starting playback of an inserted CD

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Entertainment" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "CD".

FM - AM - CD - AUX - CD... 01 14 00 : 00 Track 1

  1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. In cars with a

CD changer, select "CD" to start the CD player.

CD DVD CD CD 1 CD 2 01 14 00:00 Track 1

Playback starts automatically if the sound output is switched on.

Starting the CD changer

  1. Fill the CD changer, page 152.
  2. Press button.

This opens the start menu.

  1. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Entertainment" and press the MINI joystick.
  2. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "CD".
  3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Select the desired CD.

CD DVD - CD - CD 1 - CD 2 01 14 00:00 Track 1

At the end of the last track, the next CD is selected and played.

If new CDs have been placed in the CD changer, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g. CD 1, track 1.

The CD changer's load status is indicated on the Control Display.

SELECTING A TRACK

Buttons on the CD player

Press the button for the desired direction repeatedly until the desired track on the current CD is reached.

Playback of the CD starts at the beginning of the track. The track is displayed on the Control Display.

You can also change the track using the buttons on the steering wheel, page 11.

Using the onboard monitor

Turn the MINI joystick to select a track.

CD CD 04 14 Track 4 00 + 00

Compressed audio files*

  1. Select the directory if necessary.

CD ... CD ... + Directory 1 + Directory 2 + Directory 3 + Directory 4 + Directory 5

  1. Select a track and press the MINI joystick.

Root Directory 1 001 Track 1 002 Track 2 003 Track 3 004 Track 4 005 Track 5

To change the directory: Select a directory and press the MINI joystick.

Root → \Directory 4 001 Track 1 002 Track 2 003 Track 3 004 Track 4 005 Track 5

Exit the menu:

←→ Select the arrow.

Displaying information about the track*

With compressed audio files, any information about the current track that has been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.

  1. Press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Details".

Root Directory 1 Random all Repeat track Repeat directory Details 005 Directory 5 - Track 5

The information is shown for the current track. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

SAMPLING TRACKS, SCAN

All tracks on the current CD are automatically sampled once in succession.

  1. Select a track.
  2. Press the MINI joystick. Other menu items are displayed.

CD CD 04 14 Track 4 00:00

  1. Select "Scan".

CD ... CD ... Tone Scan Repeat Random Track 4

Stop sampling:

  1. Press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Scan".

Track sampling is interrupted and the selected track is played on.

Compressed audio files*

  1. Select the current track.
  2. Select the desired menu item:

To scan all tracks in the current directory: Select "Scan directory".
To scan all tracks on the CD: Select "Scan all".

Root \Directory 1 Tone Scan directory Scan all Random directory 005 Directory 5 - Track 5

Stop sampling

  1. Press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all".

Sampling is interrupted and the selected track is retained.

REPEATING TRACKS

  1. Select a track.
  2. Press the MINI joystick. Other menu items are displayed.

CD CD Track 4 04 14 00 : 00

  1. Select "Repeat".

CD ... CD ... Tone Scan Repeat Random Track 4

The current track on the CD is repeated.

Stop repeating

  1. Press the MINI joystick again.
  2. Select "Repeat".

Compressed audio files*

  1. Select the current track.
  2. Select the desired menu item:

To repeat the selected track: Select "Repeat track".
To repeat all tracks in the current directory: Select "Repeat directory".

Root \Directory 1 Scan all Random directory Random all Repeat track 005 Directory 5 - Track 5

Stop repeating

  1. Press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory".

RANDOM PLAY SEQUENCE

The tracks on the current CD are played once each in random order.

  1. Select a track.
  2. Press the MINI joystick. Other menu items are displayed.
  3. Select "Random".

Stop random function

  1. Press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Random".

Compressed audio files*

  1. Select the current track.
  2. Select the desired menu item:

To play back the tracks in the current directory in random order: Select "Random directory".
To play back all tracks on the CD in random order: Select "Random all".

Stop random function

  1. Press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all".

FAST FORWARD/REVERSE

Buttons on the CD player:

Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.

The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is distorted.

CD CHANGER

Close-up of a car's front dashboard and rear intake manifold (no visible text or symbols)

The MINI CD changer for 6 CDs is installed in the dashboard.

When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD changer, hold them at their edges and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.

Opening

Briefly press the bottom edge of the cover.

Closing

Push the cover back into its original position.

To prevent injury in the event of an accident, close the cover after use while the vehicle is being driven.

Controls and displays

1 2 1 - 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

1 LEDs at the CD slot LEDs flash when a CD can be inserted.
2 Buttons for CD compartments LED is lit when a CD is in the compartment.

Filling the CD changer

  1. Press the button. The LED on the first empty compartment flashes.
  2. To select another compartment if necessary: -1 ... Press the ... button.
  3. When the LEDs 1 next to the CD slot flash, insert a single CD. The CD is drawn in automatically and is placed in the selected CD compartment.

Only insert the CD when the LEDs 1 next to the CD slot are flashing, otherwise the CD or CD changer may be damaged.

Do not push the CD while it is being drawn in as this may cause it to jam and become impossible to eject.

  1. To fill additional CD compartments: Repeat steps 1-3.
  2. Close the cover after the CDs have been fully drawn in.

Filling empty CD compartments

  1. Press the button for a longer period. The LEDs on the empty CD compartments flash.
  2. When the LEDs 1 next to the CD slot flash, insert a single CD. The CD is drawn in automatically and is placed in the first vacant CD compartment.

Only insert the CD when the LEDs 1 next to the CD slot are flashing, otherwise the CD or CD changer may be damaged. Do not push the CD while it is being drawn in as this may cause it to jam and become impossible to eject.

  1. Wait for the CD to be drawn in.
  2. To fill additional CD compartments: Repeat steps 2 and 3.
  3. Close the cover after the CDs have been fully drawn in.

Removing CDs from the CD changer

  1. Press the button.
  2. ...Press the ... button to select a CD compartment. The CD is partially ejected from the CD changer.
  3. Remove the CD.
  4. Close the cover after the CDs have been removed.

Removing all CDs from the CD changer

  1. Press the button for a longer period. The CDs are partially ejected from the CD changer one after the other.
  2. Remove the CDs.
  3. Close the cover after the CDs have been removed.

Malfunction

If all LEDs on the CD changer are flashing rapidly, there is a malfunction.

To solve the problem:

  1. Press button o LOAD The CD inserted last is ejected.

  2. Remove the CD. If the LEDs stop flashing rapidly, the CD changer is operational again.

NOTES

MINI Convertible (2009) - NOTES - 1

MINI CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser products.

Do not operate if the cover is damaged, otherwise severe eye damage can result.

Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause irreparable damage to the device.

Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, otherwise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no longer eject.

Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD Plus, otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.

General malfunctions

MINI CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity

High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs

If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/DVDs, one of the following factors may be the cause.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs

Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen designed for this purpose.

Dirty or damaged CDs/DVDs

Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.

Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.

Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 120°F /50°C, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection

CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

AUX-IN PORT

You can connect an external audio device, for instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system. You can adjust the tone on the onboard monitor.

CONNECTING
AUX IN 20*

Connection for audio playback:

TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm.

To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system, connect the headset or line-out port of the external device to the AUX-In port.

STARTING AUDIO PLAYBACK

The audio device must be switched on.

Onboard monitor, for operating principle refer to page 16.

  1. Press the button.
    This opens the start menu.
  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Entertainment" and press the MINI joystick.
  3. Select "AUX".

AM - CD - AUX AUX IN ... External audio source

  1. Select "AUX IN".

  2. Adjust volume and tone, if necessary.

USB-AUDIO INTERFACE*

CONNECTIONS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES

An external audio device or USB device can be connected to the USB-audio interface, for example:

MP3 player
▶ USB memory stick
iPod/iPhone
Suitable mobile phone

If they are supported by the USB-audio interface, these devices can be controlled using the onboard monitor.

If the mobile phone has a music player connection, connect the mobile phone using the snap-in adapter, refer to the separate Owner's Manual. Audio playback is only possible if there is no device connected to the USB-audio interface.

The standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format can be played.

Due the variety of audio devices and iPods on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device will be operable on the vehicle.

Ask your MINI Service which audio devices, mobile phones or USB devices are suitable.

Connecting via the USB-audio interface
1 AUX IN 2

1 Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm

2 USB interface

iPod/iPhone

To connect the iPod, use the cable adapter for the Apple iPod.

For additional information, contact your MINI Dealer or visit the Internet at www.MINI.com

To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system, connect the iPod/ /iPhone to ports 1 and 2.

The iPod/iPhone's menu structure is supported by the USB-audio interface.

USB device

To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loudspeaker system, connect the USB device to port 2.

After the device is connected for the first time, the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of music) and the playlists are transferred from the USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may take some time. The duration depends on the USB device and the number of tracks.

During transfer, you can call up the tracks using the directories and file names.

After transfer, you can also call up the tracks using the information and playlists.

Information from up to four USB devices or for approx. 16,000 tracks can be stored on the vehicle.

If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than 16,000 tracks are to be stored, the information on existing tracks is deleted.

MINI Convertible (2009) - USB device - 1

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be played.

STARTING AUDIO PLAYBACK

  1. Press the ... button. This opens the start menu.

  2. Move the MINI joystick to highlight "Entertainment" and press the MINI joystick.

  3. Select "AUX" and press the MINI joystick.

AM - CD - AUX - AUX IN ... External audio source

  1. Select "USB" or the name of the audio device and press the MINI joystick.

Playback begins with the first track.

When you connect an iPhone via the snap-in adapter and an audio device to the AUX-In port, the audio signal from the AUX-In port is played.

SELECTING A TRACK

You can call up the tracks using the playlists and information. With USB devices you can also call up tracks using the file directory. The tracks can be displayed if they have been stored in the Latin alphabet.

  1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Artists", and press the MINI joystick.

AUX ... USB ... Playlists — Genres Track 1 Track 2 Track 3

  1. Select a track and press the MINI joystick.

Displaying information about the track

Any information about the current track that has been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.

  1. Press the MINI joystick during playback.
  2. Select "Details" and press the MINI joystick.

AUX ... USB ... Track ... Repeat track Random Details 00:25

Information on the current track is displayed.

REPEATING TRACKS

  1. Select a current track and press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Repeat track" and press the MINI joystick.

AUX ... USB ... Track ... Tone Repeat track Random 00:23

Stop repeating:

  1. Press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Repeat track" and press the MINI joystick.

RANDOM PLAY SEQUENCE

You can play the tracks in the selected list in random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.

  1. Select a current track and press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Random" and press the MINI joystick.

Stop random play:

  1. Press the MINI joystick.
  2. Select "Random" and press the MINI joystick.

FAST FORWARD/REVERSE

Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player:

Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.

NOTES

MINI Convertible (2009) - NOTES - 1

Do not expose the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g. very

high temperatures, refer to the operating instructions of the audio device. Otherwise the audio device may become damaged, which could compromise safety while driving.

Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the files may not play back correctly in every case.

Notes on connecting

The USB-audio interface supplies the connected audio devices with power, provided that this is supported by the audio device. Therefore, do not connect the USB audio device to the power socket in the vehicle during operation.
Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB-audio interface.
Do not connect USB hard disks.
Do not use the USB-audio interface to charge external devices.

Close-up of a car's wheel assembly with visible internal components (no text or symbols)

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

ENTERTAINMENT

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

REFUELING

MINI Convertible (2009) - REFUELING - 1

Switch off the engine before refueling, otherwise fuel cannot be added to the and a message will be displayed.

MINI Convertible (2009) - REFUELING - 2

Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel containers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.

FUEL FILLER DOOR

Opening

Mechanical component diagram showing a valve assembly with a black cap and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

  1. Open fuel filler door.
  2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
  3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler door.

Closing

Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Closing - 1

Do not pinch the band attached to the cap, otherwise the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or missing.

Manually releasing the fuel filler door

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can manually unlock the fuel filler door:

  1. Remove the cover from the left-hand sidewall of the cargo bay.

MINI:

Close-up of a medical scan device with a white arrow pointing to a catheter (no text or symbols visible)

MINI Convertible:

Interior view of a car trunk with visible structural components and a close-up inset showing a detail (no text or symbols)

  1. Pull on the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. The fuel filler door is released.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a magnified inset showing a detail (no visible text or symbols)

By way of example, the illustration shows the sidewall of the cargo compartment in the MINI.

Observe the following when refueling

MINI Convertible (2009) - Observe the following when refueling - 1

Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when

handling fuel, otherwise there is a danger of personal injury and property damage.

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead to

▶ premature pump shutoff.
reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity

MINI Convertible (2009) - Fuel tank capacity - 1

If the range displayed is less than 30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-

wise engine functions are not guaranteed and damage could occur.

Approx. 13.2 US gallons/50 liters, including the reserve capacity of 2.1 US gallons/8 liters.

FUEL SPECIFICATIONS

MINI Convertible (2009) - FUEL SPECIFICATIONS - 1

Do not use leaded gasoline, otherwise permanent damage to the catalytic con- r will result.

Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing 85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.

Required fuel

Super Premium gasoline/AKI 91

This gasoline is highly recommended.

However, you may also use gasoline with less AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:

▶ Cooper S, John Cooper Works: 89
Cooper: 87

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Super Premium gasoline/AKI 91 - 1

Do not use any gasoline below the specified minimum fuel grade. Otherwise the

engine could be damaged.

Use high-quality brands

Field experience has indicated significant differences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10% ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Use high-quality brands - 1

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in drivability, starting and stalling problems especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude.

Should you encounter drivability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.

WHEELS AND TIRES

TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES

Information for your safety

It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure.

Checking pressure

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that can not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using Run-Flat Tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle.

Check the tire inflation pressures only on cold tires. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the flat tire monitor, page 79, or reset the tire pressure control, page 81.

Checking the tire inflation pressure of the space-saver spare tire*

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism and component placement (no text or labels)

A valve extension for checking the inflation pressure is located behind the bumper.

Inflation pressure specifications

The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.

The tire inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and the tire brands recommended by the manufacturer of your MINI. Your MINI Dealer will be glad to advise you.

For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressures, observe the following:

▶ Tire sizes for your vehicle
Load conditions
▶ Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h

For normal driving speeds of up to 100 mph or 160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the columns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.

These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's-side door post when the driver's door is open.

Close-up of a car interior showing the wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

MINI Convertible (2009) - Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h - 2

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph or 160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h

MINI Convertible (2009) - Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h - 1

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the columns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits, otherwise violations of the laws could occur.

MINI Cooper tire inflation pressures

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/h

Speeds including those exceeding 100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Cooper tire inflation pressures - 1

MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Cooper tire inflation pressures - 2

MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Cooper tire inflation pressures - 3

175/65 R 15 84 T M+S
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S
175/65 R 15 84 H
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H
195/55 R 16 87 H RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC

33/230 33/230 33/230 33/230 38/260 38/260

Emergency wheel:

115/70 R 15 90 M

60/420 60/420 -- 60/420 60/420

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.

MINI Cooper S tire inflation pressures

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/hSpeeds including those exceeding 100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperatureMINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Cooper S tire inflation pressures - 1MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Cooper S tire inflation pressures - 2MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Cooper S tire inflation pressures - 3
195/55 R 16 87 V195/55 R 16 87 V RSC195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC33/230 33/230 33/230 33/230 38/260 38/260
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC205/45 R 17 84 V RSC205/40 R 18 82 W RSC175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC38/260 38/260 38/260 38/260 41/280 41/280
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.

MINI John Cooper Works tire inflation pressures

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Speeds up to a max. of 100 mph/ 160 km/hSpeeds including those exceeding 100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperatureMINI Convertible (2009) - MINI John Cooper Works tire inflation pressures - 1MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI John Cooper Works tire inflation pressures - 2MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI John Cooper Works tire inflation pressures - 3
185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC205/45 R 17 84 W RSC38/26038/26038/26041/280
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC41/28041/28041/28041/280
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.

MINI Cooper Convertible tire inflation pressures

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/hSpeeds including those exceeding 100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperatureMINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Cooper Convertible tire inflation pressures - 1
175/65 R 15 84 T M+S
175/65 R 15 84 H
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S
175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H
195/55 R 16 87 H RSC35/240 35/240 35/240 35/240 38/260 38/260
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V RSC
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC
Emergency wheel: 115/70 R 15 90 M60/420 60/420 -- 60/420 60/420

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.

MINI Cooper S Convertible tire inflation pressures

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/hSpeeds including those exceeding 100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperatureMINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Cooper S Convertible tire inflation pressures - 1MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Cooper S Convertible tire inflation pressures - 2MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Cooper S Convertible tire inflation pressures - 3
195/55 R 16 87 V195/55 R 16 87 V RSC195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC195/55 R 16 87 V M+S RSC35/240 35/240 35/240 35/240 38/260 38/260
205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC205/45 R 17 84 V RSC205/40 R 18 82 W RSC175/60 R 16 82 H M+S RSC39/270 39/270 39/270 39/270 42/290 42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.

MINI John Cooper Works Convertible tire inflation pressures

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Speeds up to a max. of 100 mph/ 160 km/hSpeeds including those exceeding 100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperatureMINI Convertible (2009) - MINI John Cooper Works Convertible tire inflation pressures - 1MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI John Cooper Works Convertible tire inflation pressures - 2MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI John Cooper Works Convertible tire inflation pressures - 3
185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC205/45 R 17 84 V M+S RSC205/45 R 17 84 W RSC39/27039/27039/27042/29042/290
205/40 R 18 82 W RSC42/29042/29042/29042/29045/310
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 205.

TIRE CODING

Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

e.g. 225/45 R 17 91 V Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in % Radial belt construction Rim diameter in inches Load rating, not on ZR tires Speed code letter, in front of the R on ZR tires

Speed code letter

Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

e.g. DOT xxxx xxx 0309 Manufacturer's code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Tread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

MINI Convertible (2009) - DOT Quality Grades - 1

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Traction - 1

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking tracests, and does not include acceleration, ring, hydroplaning, or peak traction charstics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Temperature - 1

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC - Run-Flat Tires

You will recognize Run-Flat Tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, page 173.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires.

These have better winter properties than summer tires.

XL

Designation for specially reinforced tires.

TIRE CONDITION

Inspect your tires regularly for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Tread depth

The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/3 mm, although, for example, European legislation only specifies a minimum tread depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface.

Winter tires

When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of safety, new tires should be installed.

Minimum tread depth
Close-up of a car tire tread pattern with a magnified inset showing the edge detail (no text or symbols)

Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire's circumference; the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators. When tire tread is worn down to the level of the wear indicators, the remaining tread depth is 1/16 in/1.6 mm.

Tire damage

Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more susceptible to road hazard and consequential damages.

Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for example, be caused by driving over curbs. The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior, such as pulling severely to the right or left.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Tire damage - 1

In these cases, reduce speed immediately and have wheels and tires thoroughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest MINI Dealer or tire shop that works according to MINI repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there.

Otherwise tire damage can be extremely dangerous for vehicle occupants and other road users.

Tire age

The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding:

DOT ... 0309 means that the tire was manufactured in week 3 of 2009.

For various reasons, such as the development of brittleness, the manufacturer of your MINI rec-

ommends tire replacement after no more than 6 years, regardless of the actual wear of the tires.

RUN-FLAT TIRES*

RSC MENI

The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall.

Run-Flat Tires comprise a conditionally self-supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforcement in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can continue to be used subject to certain restrictions, even if depressurized.

For information on continuing to drive with a flat tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 80.

NEW WHEELS AND TIRES

MINI Convertible (2009) - NEW WHEELS AND TIRES - 1

Have new wheels and tires mounted only by your MINI Dealer or a specialized tire

shop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.

Retreaded tires

MINI Convertible (2009) - Retreaded tires - 1

The manufacturer of your MINI recommends that you avoid using retreaded tires, as this could impair driving safety. The causes for this include potentially different tire casing structures and often wide variations in tire age, which can result in a limited service life.

Correct wheels and tires

MINI Convertible (2009) - Correct wheels and tires - 1

The manufacturer of your MINI recommends mounting only wheels and tires that it has specifically approved for use on your particular model. Although other wheels and tires may theoretically have the same dimensions, variations in factors such as manufacturing tolerances can result in contact between tire and bodywork, ultimately leading to serious accidents. The manufacturer of your MINI cannot evaluate non-approved wheels and tires to determine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they are mounted.

Your MINI Dealer will be glad to inform you about the correct wheel and tire combination for your vehicle.

The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS and DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been damaged, mount the previous wheel and tire combination again as soon as possible.

Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM electronics

When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a puncture, refer to page 83. Your MINI Dealer will be glad to advise you.

Close-up of a tire with star markings and an arrow pointing to it, no visible text or symbols.

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your MINI recommends certain tire brands. They are marked with a clearly visible MINI designation on the sidewall of the tire.

When properly used, these tires meet the highest standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.

Run-Flat Tires*

When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. Keep in mind that no space-saver spare tire is available in the event of a flat. Your MINI Dealer will be glad to advise you.

Special characteristics of winter tires

The manufacturer of MINI recommends the use of winter tires on snowy roads or if temperatures drop below 45° F / +7°C. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.

Pay attention to speed

MINI Convertible (2009) - Pay attention to speed - 1

Always comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car; failure to do so could result in tire damage and accidents.

If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the mounted tires must be displayed in your field of view. Specialist tire dealers and your MINI Dealer can supply these labels.

Storage

Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.

Swapping wheels among the axles

Depending on the individual use, front and rear tires may exhibit different wear and tear.

In order to maintain an even wear and tear, the wheels may be rotated between the axles. Your MINI Dealer will be glad to advise you.

Always check the inflation pressure after the tire rotation, if necessary change the pressure.

SNOW CHAINS*

Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your MINI, classified as road-safe and recommended. Contact your MINI Dealer for more details.

Only attach snow chains in pairs to the front wheels with the following tires.

175/65 R 15 M+S

175/60 R 16 M+S

John Cooper Works:

185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h.

MINI Convertible (2009) - SNOW CHAINS* - 1

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted, otherwise the instrument might issue an incorrect reading.

When driving with snow chains, it can be useful to briefly deactivate the DSC or activate the DTC, refer to page 77.

UNDER THE BONNET

Do not work on the car unless you possess the necessary technical knowledge. If you are not familiar with the regulations to be observed, have the necessary work on your vehicle carried out only by a MINI Dealer or a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

BONNET

Releasing
Close-up of a car door handle with a black clip and directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever.

Do not clean the windshield and head-lamps if the bonnet is unlocked as this may damage the headlamp washer system*.

Opening
Close-up of a car's front grille and dashboard, showing a close-up of the grille with a small inset image of a hand holding a tool (no text or symbols visible)

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield before you open the bonnet.

Press the release handle and open the bonnet.

Closing
Close-up of a car's front grille with a white arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols visible)

Close the bonnet from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

If you notice any signs while driving your vehicle that the bonnet is not completely closed, stop at once and close it securely. Make sure that the closing path of the bonnet is clear, otherwise injuries may result.

IMPORTANT PARTS OF THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Battery, under the cover 197
2 Engine oil dipstick 176
3 Engine oil filler neck 177

4 Coolant expansion tank 177
5 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlamp and window washer system 57
6 Engine compartment fuse box 195

ENGINE OIL

The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.

Checking engine oil level

  1. With the vehicle's engine at normal operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted driving for at least 6 miles/10 km, park the vehicle on a level surface.
  2. Switch off the engine.
  3. Pull the dipstick out after approx. 5 minutes and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth, paper towel or similar material.
  4. Carefully push the dipstick all the way into the guide tube and pull it out again. The oil level should be between the two marks on the dipstick.

MIN MAX

The oil quantity corresponding to the difference between the two marks on the dipstick is 1 US quart/1 liter.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Checking engine oil level - 2

Do not fill beyond the upper mark on the dipstick. Excess oil will damage the

engine.

Adding engine oil

Diagram of a car engine compartment with a circular component and directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Do not add the maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until the oil level has dropped to just above the lower mark on the dipstick, page 176.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Adding engine oil - 2

Add oil within the next 30 miles/50 km, otherwise the engine could be dam-

aged.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Adding engine oil - 3

Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the warnings on

the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may result.

Oil change

Have the oil changed only by a MINI Dealer or a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer.

Approved engine oils

The quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine. Based on extensive testing, the manufacturer of your MINI regularly approves certain grades of engine oil.

Only use High Performance Synthetic Oil approved by the manufacturer of your MINI.

If MINI High Performance Synthetic Oil is not available, you can add small quantities of another synthetic oil in between oil changes. Only use oils with the API SM specification or higher.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Approved engine oils - 1

If you have any further questions regarding MINI High Performance Synthetic Oil

or approved synthetic oils, your MINI Dealer will be glad to advise you.

You can also call MINI USA at

1-800-831-1117 or visit the website

www.miniusa.com to obtain this information.

Viscosity grades

Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and is categorized in SAE classes.

The correct SAE grade for your MINI is determined by the climatic conditions of the region in which you normally drive your MINI.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Viscosity grades - 1

The approved oils are SAE 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 and 5W-30.

These oils can be used for driving at all outside temperatures.

MINI RECOMMENDS

Castrol

COOLANT

MINI Convertible (2009) - COOLANT - 1

Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant cause burns.

Coolant consists of half water and half additive. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your MINI. Your MINI Dealer knows which additives are suitable and will be glad to advise you.

MINI Convertible (2009) - COOLANT - 2

Only use suitable additives, otherwise engine damage may result. Because addi-are harmful to your health, it is important how the instructions on the containers.

MINI Convertible (2009) - COOLANT - 3

Comply with the appropriate environmental protection regulations when disposing plant additives.

Checking coolant level

  1. Do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down.

  2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.

  3. The coolant level is correct if it is between the Min and Max markings.

  4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

  5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
  6. Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

MAINTENANCE

The MINI Maintenance System supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your MINI. The objective is to optimize efforts with respect to minimal vehicle maintenance costs.

If and when you come to sell your MINI, a comprehensive record of servicing will prove a significant benefit.

Condition Based Service CBS

Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your MINI into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.

On the Control Display, you can have the remaining times or distances for selected maintenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed, page 65.

Service data in the remote control

Your vehicle continuously stores service-requirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your MINI Dealer can read out this data from the remote control unit, and propose an optimized maintenance approach. Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore hand your MINI Dealer the remote control unit that you last used.

Make sure that the date is always set correctly, page 69; otherwise the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured.

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements.

The manufacturer of the MINI recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your MINI Dealer. Take the time to ensure that these service procedures are confirmed by entries in your vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance.

SOCKET FOR ONBOARD DIAGNOSIS OBD

Close-up of a car interior showing a cable and seatbelt, with an inset close-up of a small electronic device (no visible text or symbols)

Primary components that make up exhaust emissions can be checked by a device via the OBD socket.

This socket is located to the left of the driver's side, on the bottom of the instrument panel.

EXHAUST EMISSION VALUES

MINI Convertible (2009) - EXHAUST EMISSION VALUES - 1

The warning lamps come on. The exhaust emission values have turned poor and there is a danger of engine damage. You can continue your journey, but moderate your speed and exercise due caution. Have the car checked as soon as possible.

Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps will flash or light up continuously. This indicates excessive misfiring or a malfunction in the engine. If this happens, reduce your speed and visit the nearest MINI Dealer as soon as possible. Severe misfiring can quickly lead to serious damage of emissions-related components, especially the catalytic converter. In addition, mechanical engine components can become damaged.

If the fuel filler cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system may conclude that fuel vapors are escaping, causing an indicator to light up. If the filler cap is then tightened, the indicator should go out within a few days.

Event data recorders

Your vehicle may be equipped with one or several measuring or diagnostic modules or a device for recording or sending certain vehicle data or information.

CARE

CAR-CARE PRODUCTS

Regular cleaning and care helps to maintain the value of your MINI.

The manufacturer of your MINI recommends using manufacturer-approved products to clean and care for your vehicle.

MINI Service would be pleased to advise you on cleaning and care products and services for your MINI.

MINI Convertible (2009) - CAR-CARE PRODUCTS - 1

The ingredients of original MINI CareProducts have been tested, and the products

have been tested in the laboratory and in practice. They offer optimum care and protection for your vehicle.

MINI Convertible (2009) - CAR-CARE PRODUCTS - 2

Do not use any cleansers containing alcohol or solvents as these may cause age.

MINI Convertible (2009) - CAR-CARE PRODUCTS - 3

Cleaning agents may contain hazardous or health-damaging substances. Follow

the warning and hazard instructions on the packaging. For interior cleaning, always open the doors or windows of the vehicle.

Do not use any products that are not intended for cleaning the vehicle.

EXTERNAL CARE

Washing your vehicle

MINI Convertible (2009) - Washing your vehicle - 1

Especially during the winter months the vehicle should be frequently washed. Dirt

and road salt can damage the vehicle.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Washing your vehicle - 2

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them, otherwise

water can reduce braking efficiency over the short term and the brake rotors can corrode.

Car washes

Preference should be given to cloth car washes.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Car washes - 1

Do not use automatic high-pressure car washes, otherwise water may drip into the

vehicle around the windows.

Before driving into the car wash, check if the system is suitable for your MINI. Observe the following points:

▶ Dimensions of the vehicle, page 203
If necessary: Fold in the outside mirrors, page 46.
▶ Maximum permissible tire width

MINI Convertible (2009) - Car washes - 2

Avoid car washes with tracks higher than 4 in/10 cm, otherwise the chassis could be

damaged.

Preparations for driving into the car wash:

▶ Unscrew the rod antenna.
Deactivate the rain sensor* to prevent unintentional wiping.
Deactivate the rear window wiper* and protect it from damage. Ask the car wash operator about measures that can be taken to protect the wipers.
Remove additional attachments, e.g. spoilers or telephone antennas, if there is a possibility that they could be damaged.

Automatic transmission

Before driving into the car wash, make sure that the vehicle can roll:

  1. Place the remote control, even with convenient access, in the ignition lock.
  2. Move the selector lever to position N.
  3. Release the parking brake.
  4. Switch off the engine.
  5. Insert the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Steam jets/high-pressure washers

MINI Convertible (2009) - Steam jets/high-pressure washers - 1

When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, ensure that you maintain a suffi-

cient distance to the vehicle and do not exceed a

maximum temperature of 140° F/ 60° C. If the distance is too close, the pressure too high, or the temperature too high, parts of the vehicle can be damaged, or water can penetrate. Observe the operating instructions for high-pressure washers.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Steam jets/high-pressure washers - 2

Do not spray sensors such as Park Distance Control with high-pressure

washers for a long time or at a distance of less than 1 ft/30 cm.

Manual washing

Use a great deal of water and, if necessary, car shampoo when washing your car by hand. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or a washing brush applying a slight amount of pressure.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Manual washing - 1

Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the rain sensor or turn off the ignition event unintentional wiping.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Manual washing - 2

Observe local regulations regarding washing vehicles by hand.

Headlamps

Do not wipe dry and do not use abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents. Remove dirt and contamination, such as insects, by soaking with shampoo and then washing with plenty of water.

Do not remove accumulated ice and snow with an ice scraper; use window de-icers instead.

Windows

Clean the outside and inside of the windows and mirrors with a window cleaner.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Windows - 1

Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners containing quartz.

Wiper blades

Clean with soapy water and change regularly to prevent the formation of streaks

MINI Convertible (2009) - Wiper blades - 1

Wax, preservatives and dirt on the windows cause streaks when the windshield wipers are on, and can cause premature wear of the wiper blades and interfere with the rain sensor.

Care of the convertible top

The appearance and service life of the convertible top largely depends on its proper care and operation.

Please follow these instructions:

▶ Never attempt to fold and stow the convertible top in the convertible compartment when the top is wet or frozen. Otherwise water stains, mildew, and chafe marks may occur.
If water spots occur on the inside headliner despite precautions, remove them using a microfiber cloth and interior cleaner.
If the vehicle is parked in an enclosed area for a longer period of time, make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.
Remove any bird droppings immediately, since they have corrosive properties which will corrode the convertible top and damage the rubber seals.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Care of the convertible top - 1

When attempting to remove stains from the convertible top, do not use spot

removers, paint thinners, solvents, gasoline, or similar fluids. These cleaners may damage the rubber seals. The improper care or cleaning methods may cause the convertible top and its seams to leak.

Use special convertible top cleaning agents if attempting to remove heavy stains.

Always read and follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Use an impregnating agent to treat the convertible top once a year.

Paintwork, care

Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value and protects the paint from the long-term effects of aggressive substances.

In some regions, environmental factors can affect the vehicle paintwork and damage it. It is therefore important to adjust the frequency and extent of vehicle care correspondingly.

Immediately remove aggressive materials such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree sap or

bird droppings to prevent damage to the paintwork.

Removing paintwork damage

MINI Convertible (2009) - Removing paintwork damage - 1

Depending on the severity of the damage, immediately repair stone damage or scratches to prevent rusting.

The manufacturer of the MINI recommends repairing paint damage professionally according to factory specifications with original MINI paints.

Preservation

Preservation is necessary when water no longer beads on the clean paint surface. To preserve the paint, only use preservatives that contain carnauba or synthetic waxes.

Rubber seals

Only treat with water or rubber care products.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Rubber seals - 1

Do not use silicon sprays or other silicon-containing care products on rubber seals, wise noise and damage could occur.

Chrome parts*

Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radiator grill and door handles with copious quantities of water and, if necessary, a shampoo additive, especially when contaminated with road salt. For additional treatment, use chrome polish.

Light-alloy wheels*

The system produces brake dust that collects on the light alloy wheels. Clean them regularly with acid-free wheel cleaner.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Light-alloy wheels* - 1

Do not use aggressive, acid-containing highly alkaline or abrasive cleansers or steam jets above 140 °F /60 °C as they may cause damage.

External sensors

MINI Convertible (2009) - External sensors - 1

Keep the outside sensors on the vehicle such as the Park Distance Control clean and ice-free to ensure that they function properly.

INTERNAL CARE

Upholstery/fabrics

Regularly use a vacuum cleaner to remove surface dirt.

In case of serious spots such as liquid stains, use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth and suitable interior cleaners. Observe the instructions on the packaging.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Upholstery/fabrics - 1

Clean upholstery up to the seams. Do not rub forcefully.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Upholstery/fabrics - 2

Velcro fasteners on pants or other items of clothing can damage seat covers. Make hat all Velcro fasteners are closed.

Leather/leather coverings*

MINI Convertible (2009) - Leather/leather coverings* - 1

The leather processed by the manufacturer of your MINI is a high-quality natural duct. Light variations in the grain is one of typical properties of natural leather.

Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the leather have an abrasive effect, leading to increased wear and causing the leather surface to become brittle prematurely. Use a cloth or vacuum cleaner to remove dust on a regular basis.

Especially when the leather has a light color, it should be cleaned regularly since it tends to get heavily soiled.

Treat the leather twice a year using a leather lotion since dirt and grease will gradually attack the leather's protective layer.

Carpets/floor mats*

You can use a vacuum cleaner on carpets and floor mats, or clean them with interior cleaners when they are very dirty.

Floor mats can be removed to be cleaned. When putting the floor mats, back in, make sure that the seat rails do not extend over the floor mats as this may damage them.

Lint on floor mats arises from manufacturing and can be removed by repeated vacuuming.

Interior plastic parts

These include:

Plastic surfaces
Lamp glass
▷ Display panes
Matte parts

Only clean with water and, if necessary, solvent-free plastic cleaners.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Interior plastic parts - 1

Do not use solvents such as alcohol, lac- quer thinner, cold cleaners, fuel, or similar,

as these will damage the surfaces.

Decorative strips*

Only clean decorative strips with moist cloths. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.

Safety belts

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Safety belts - 1

Do not clean chemically, as this may destroy the webbing.

Displays

To clean displays such as radios or display elements, use a display cleaning cloth or a soft, non-scratching, lint-free cloth.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Displays - 1

Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning the display as this can cause damage.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Displays - 2

Do not use chemical or abrasive household cleaning agents. Keep fluids of any

kind away from the device. Surfaces or electrical components may otherwise become corroded or damaged.

CD/DVD drives

MINI Convertible (2009) - CD/DVD drives - 1

Do not use cleaning CDs as this could damage parts of the drive.

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are not going to drive your car for more than three months, please ask for advice from your MINI dealer or a workshop that works according to MINI manufacturer specifications.

REPLACING COMPONENTS

ONBOARD TOOL KIT

Black-and-white photo of a toolbox containing various kitchen utensils and tools (no visible text or labels)

Your vehicle comes with an onboard tool kit that varies with the equipment version; it is stored underneath the level load floor.

Mobility System with onboard tool kit and tire change set* 190
Tire change set with onboard tool kit for space-saver spare tire 192

WIPER BLADES

Changing the front wiper blades

  1. Fold up the wiper arm.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a pointed tip and internal structure, no visible text or symbols

  1. Position the wiper blade horizontally.
  2. Press the securing spring, arrow.
  3. Unhook the wiper blade toward the wind-shield.
  4. Pull the wiper blade past the wiper arm toward the top.
  5. Insert the new wiper blade.
  6. Press into position until you hear it engage.

  7. Fold down the wiper arm.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Changing the front wiper blades - 2

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the bonnet.

MINI: Changing the rear wiper blade

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with a white arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Fold up the wiper arm.
  2. Rotate the wiper blade toward the back as far as it will go, arrow.
  3. Press the wiper blade against the limit and thus out of the mounting.
  4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixture until it engages audibly.

LAMPS AND BULBS

Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be handled carefully. The manufacturer of your MINI recommends having your MINI Dealer perform any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.

MINI Convertible (2009) - LAMPS AND BULBS - 1

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your MINI Dealer.

MINI Convertible (2009) - LAMPS AND BULBS - 2

When working on electrical systems, always begin by switching off the con-

sumer in question, otherwise short circuits could result. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.

Caring for headlamps, refer to page 182.

For any bulb replacement not described below, contact a MINI Dealer or a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer.

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your MINI Dealer.

Light-emitting diodes LEDs

Light-emitting diodes installed behind translucent lenses serve as the light sources for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes are related to conventional laser diodes, and legislation defines them as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source for several hours, otherwise this could cause irritation to the retina.

Bi-Xenon lamps*

The service life of these bulbs is very long and the probability of failure very low, provided that they are not switched on and off an excessive number of times. If a xenon lamp fails nevertheless, switch on the fog lamps and continue the journey with great care, provided that local legislation does not prohibit this.

Have any work on the xenon lamp system, including bulb replacement, carried out only by a MINI Dealer or a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer. Due to high voltage, there is a risk of fatal injury if work on the xenon lamps is carried out improperly.

Halogen low beams and high beams

H13 bulb, 60/55 watts

The H13 bulb is pressurized. Therefore, wear safety glasses and protective gloves. Otherwise there is a risk of injury if the bulb is damaged.

Be careful when installing the cover, otherwise leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlamp system.

Accessing the lamp from the engine compartment

The low-beam/high-beam bulb can be changed from the engine compartment.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a component (no visible text or symbols)

Removing the cover:

  1. Press the tab.
  2. Flip open the cover and take it out of the holder.

Follow the same steps in reverse order to reattach the cover.

Be careful when installing the cover, otherwise leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlamp system.

Replacing the bulb

  1. Turn the lamp counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove it, arrow 2.

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled parts 1 and 2, likely illustrating a gear or cam mechanism.

  1. Push on the catch, arrow 1, and unplug the connector, arrow 2.

Mechanical component diagram showing a shaft and housing assembly with labeled parts (1 and 2), no readable text or symbols present.

  1. To insert the new bulb and replace the cover, proceed in reverse order.

Turn signal indicators, parking lamps, roadside parking lamps and fog lamps

Accessing the lamps via the wheel well

1 2

1 Turn signal

2 Parking/roadside parking/fog lamps

Replacing a turn signal bulb

21 watt bulb, PY 21 W

  1. Turn in the wheel.

  2. Remove cover 1.

To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.

  1. Remove the inside cover.

To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.

Close-up of a car wheel rim with a circular dial indicator and arrow symbol (no text or labels)

  1. Screw out the bulb counterclockwise.

Close-up of a circular mechanical component with internal features and a white arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

  1. To insert the new bulb and replace the covers, proceed in reverse order.

Replacing a parking/roadside parking lamp bulb

5 watt bulb, W 5 W

  1. Turn in the wheel.

  2. Remove cover 2.

To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.

  1. Screw out the upper bulb counterclockwise.

Close-up of a mechanical component inside a circular housing, showing internal components and a small inset view (no text or symbols visible)

  1. To insert the new bulb and replace the cover, proceed in reverse order.

Replacing a fog lamp bulb

H8 bulb, 35 watts

  1. Turn in the wheel.
  2. Remove cover 2.
    To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.
  3. Screw out the lower bulb counterclockwise.

Circular diagram with internal mechanical components, no visible text or symbols

  1. To insert the new bulb and replace the cover, proceed in reverse order.

Side turn signal indicators

5 watt bulb, W 5 W

  1. Push the lamp with the ventilation grate forward and remove.

Close-up of a car's side profile with a black circular button and an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Screw out the bulb holder counterclockwise.
  2. Pull out and replace the bulb.
  3. To insert the new bulb and replace the cover, proceed in reverse order.

Tail lamps

1 2 1 3

1 Brake lamp/tail lamp 21 watt/5 watt bulb, W 5 W
2 Turn signal lamp 21 watt bulb, P 21 W
3 Backup lamp 21 watt bulb, P 21 W

Lamp access

MINI:

Remove the cover from the sidewall of the cargo bay.

Close-up of a medical CT scanner with a white arrow pointing to the opening (no text or symbols visible)

MINI Convertible:

Move the convertible top to its uppermost position, see Loading aid page 104, and remove the cover of the luggage compartment side wall.

Interior view of a car trunk with visible structural components and a close-up inset showing a hand near the side (no text or symbols)

Changing

  1. Screw out the desired bulb counterclockwise, arrows 1.

Additional bulbs are located behind the sidewall of the cargo bay, arrow 2.

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered labels indicating parts of the door and window

  1. To insert the new bulb and replace the cover, proceed in reverse order.

Rear fog lamp*

21 watt bulb, P 21 W

Access to the lamp via the back or underside of the bumper.

The illustration shows the fog lamp in the bumper of the MINI Cooper.

Side view of a car's front bumper with an arrow pointing to the nose area (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Screw out the bulb holder counterclockwise.
  2. Screw out and replace the bulb.
  3. To insert the new bulb and bulb holder, proceed in reverse order.

License plate lamps

5 watt bulb, C 5 W

Side view of a car with a triangular blade being cut off, showing two arrows pointing to the blade (no text or symbols present)

  1. Using a screwdriver, push the lamp to the left in the tab of the lamp housing, arrow 1.
  2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.
  3. Replace the bulb.
  4. Insert the lamp.

Center brake lamp

This lamp uses LED technology for operation. In the event of a malfunction, contact your MINI Dealer or a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the specifications of your MINI manufacturer.

REPAIRING A FLAT TIRE

MINI Convertible (2009) - REPAIRING A FLAT TIRE - 1

Safety measures in the event of a break-down:

Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic and switch on the hazard warning flashers.

Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. Engage the parking brake and shift into 1st or reverse gear or place the selector lever in position P.

All passengers should be outside the vehicle and in a safe place, e.g. behind a guardrail.

Erect a warning triangle or warning flasher at the appropriate distance if necessary. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

In the event of a flat tire, different procedures should be followed depending on the equipment included in your vehicle:

MINI Mobility System, refer to the following section
▶ Run-Flat Tires, page 173

▶ Tire change with space-saver spare tire, page 192

MINI Mobility System with onboard tool kit and tire change set*

MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Mobility System with onboard tool kit and tire change set* - 1

Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compressor and

the sealant bottle.

Do not remove foreign bodies which have penetrated the tire if possible.

Pull the sticker for the speed restriction off and apply it to the steering wheel.

The Mobility System with onboard tool kit and tire change set* is located under the floor mat in the cargo bay.

Labeled diagram of a device interior with numbered components for identification

1 Filling canister
2 Hexagon wrench *
3 Vehicle jack*
4 Wheel stud wrench
5 Flat screwdriver/Phillips screwdriver, towing eyelet
6 Compressor
7 Package with filling hose, valve remover, valve insert and speed restriction label

MINI Convertible (2009) - MINI Mobility System with onboard tool kit and tire change set* - 3

Use of the Mobility System may be ineffective if the tire puncture measures approx.

1/8 in/4 mm or more. Contact the nearest MINI Dealer if the tire cannot be made drivable with the Mobility System.

Liquid sealant

1 2

1 Filling hose
2 Filling canister

Filling

  1. Shake the filling canister.
  2. Screw the filling hose onto the filling canister.
  3. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the defective tire.
  4. Screw out the valve core with the valve remover. The valve remover is located in a package with the filling hose.
  5. Remove the cap from the filling hose.
  6. Push the filling hose onto the tire valve.
  7. Hold the filling canister with the cap down and squeeze.
  8. Squeeze the entire contents of the canister into the tire.
  9. Remove the filling hose.
  10. Screw the valve core into the tire valve with the valve remover.

In the event of a lost or dirty valve core you will find another valve core in the package with the filling hose.

Remember that the liquid canister must be replaced every four years if the equipment has not been used.

Compressor

Connector, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

1 2 3 4 5

1 Connector and cable for lighter socket
2 Connection hose for connecting the compressor and tire valve
3 On/off switch
4 Pressure gauge for indicating the tire inflation pressure
5 Release button for reducing the tire inflation pressure

Reinflating the tire

  1. Unscrew the dust cap from the tire valve of the defective tire.
  2. Screw connection hose 2 onto the tire valve.
  3. Insert connector 1 into the lighter socket in the interior of the vehicle, page 99.
  4. Switch on the compressor using switch 3.
  5. Inflate the tire to at least 26 psi/180 kPa and at most 36 psi/250 kPa.

To check the inflation pressure, switch off the compressor briefly.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Reinflating the tire - 1

Do not run the compressor for longer than 6 minutes, otherwise the device overheat and possibly be damaged.

If an air pressure of 26 psi/180 kPa is not reached:

  1. Unscrew connection hose 2 and drive the vehicle forward and backward about 33 ft/10 m to distribute the liquid sealant in the tires evenly.
  2. Repeat the procedure.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Reinflating the tire - 2

If an inflation pressure of 26 psi/180 kPa still cannot be reached, the tire is too

heavily damaged. Please contact the nearest MINI Dealer.

Distributing liquid sealant

Immediately drive for approx. 10 minutes, so that the liquid sealant is uniformly distributed.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Distributing liquid sealant - 1

Do not exceed speeds of 40 mph/60 km/h.

If possible, do not drop below 10 mph/20 km/h.

Checking tire inflation pressure

  1. After driving for approx. 10 minutes, pull over at a suitable location.
  2. Screw connection hose 2 onto the tire valve.
  3. Check the tire inflation pressure.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Checking tire inflation pressure - 1

The tire pressure must be at least 18 psi/130 kPa. If it is not, do not condriving.

If a tire pressure of at least 18 psi/130 kPa is displayed:

  1. Switch on the compressor. Correct the tire inflation pressure to the specified value, page 164.
  2. Replace the tire as soon as possible.

Driving on

MINI Convertible (2009) - Driving on - 1

Do not exceed the permitted maximum speed of 50 mph/80 km/h; doing so may in an accident.

Replace the defective tire as soon as possible and have the new wheel/tire assembly balanced.

Have the Mobility System refilled.

Tire change set

When changing a tire, always observe the safety measures and the procedure for changing tires described below.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Tire change set - 1

In case of a flat tire, the tire change set is not needed due to the availability of the

Mobility System.

CHANGING WHEELS

Space-saver spare tire*

To change a space-saver spare tire, proceed as follows:

Remove the space-saver spare tire, page 192
Prepare for tire change, page 193
Jack up vehicle, page 193
Mount space-saver spare tire, page 194
▶ Tighten lug bolts, page 194
▶ Drive with space-saver spare tire, page 193

Tire change set for a space-saver spare tire*

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

On vehicles with a space-saver spare tire, the tire change set with onboard tools is stored under the floor mat in the cargo bay.

1 Chock, folding
2 Hub cover remover
3 Wheel stud wrench
4 Vehicle jack
5 Special wrench for removing the space-saver spare tire
6 Flat screwdriver/Phillips screwdriver
7 Towing eyelet
8 Lifting handle

The onboard tool kit includes a pouch with a plastic bag in which you can place the damaged wheel.

Removing the space-saver spare tire

The screw connection of the space-saver spare tire is under the floor mat in the cargo bay, on the base of the storage compartment for the tire change set.

  1. Unscrew the screw connection with the special wrench.
  2. Take out the cover panel.

Close-up of a mechanical lever handle and base component (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Screw the lifting handle from the onboard tool kit onto the thread.

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever mechanism with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

  1. Raise the lifting handle slightly.
  2. Squeeze the securing spring.

Close-up of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols visible)

  1. The space-saver spare tire is released and must be held by the lifting handle.
  2. Lower the space-saver spare tire with the lifting handle.
  3. Unscrew the lifting handle.

  4. Pull the space-saver spare tire underneath the vehicle out towards the rear.

Close-up of a car's rear suspension system with a tire and valve, showing a downward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

  1. Position the space-saver spare tire with the valve facing upward.
  2. Unscrew the valve extension from the valve of the space-saver spare tire.
  3. Unscrew the dust cap from the extension and place it on the valve of the space-saver spare tire.
    Due to its different dimensions, the damaged wheel cannot be placed in the recess for the space-saver spare tire.

Driving with the space-saver spare tire

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Changes may occur in vehicle handling such as lower track stability during braking, longer braking distances and changes in self-steering properties when close to the handling limit. These properties are more noticeable with winter tires.

Only one space-saver spare tire may be mounted at one time. Mount a wheel and tire of the original size as soon as possible, to avoid any safety risks.

Check the tire inflation pressure at the earliest opportunity and correct it if necessary. Replace the defective tire as soon as possible and have the new wheel/tire assembly balanced.

Preparing for a tire change

Observe the safety precautions regarding flat tires on page 189.

Additional safety measures when changing tires:

Only change the tire when parked on a surface that is level, firm and not slippery.

The vehicle or the jack could slip sideways on soft or slippery support surfaces, such as snow, ice, flagstones, etc.

Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a support base for the jack, as this would prevent it from extending to its full support height and reduce its load-carrying capacity.

Do not lie under the vehicle or start the engine when the vehicle is supported by the jack; otherwise there is a risk of fatal injury.

  1. Place the foldable chock * behind the front wheel on the other side of the vehicle or in front of the wheel if the vehicle is on an incline. If the wheel is changed on a surface with a more severe slope, take additional precautions to secure the vehicle from rolling.
  2. Uncover the lug bolts if necessary. If the wheel is equipped with a hub cover, pry it off using the screwdriver from the tire change kit.
  3. Loosen the lug bolts by a half turn.

Jacking up the vehicle

Side view of a car with two upward arrows indicating motion or force indicators (no text or symbols present)

The vehicle jack is designed for changing wheels only. Do not attempt to raise another vehicle model with it or to raise any load of any kind. To do so could cause accidents and personal injury.

  1. Place the jack at the jacking point closest to the wheel.

The jack base must be perpendicular to the surface beneath the jacking point.

Mechanical testing setup showing a wheel mounted on a tripod with a magnified inset of a device (no visible text or symbols)

  1. During jacking up, insert the jack head in the square recess of the jacking point.
  2. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are changing is raised off the ground.

Mounting the space-saver spare tire

  1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the wheel.
  2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from the mounting surfaces of the wheel and hub. Clean the lug bolts.
  3. Lift the new wheel into place.
  4. Screw at least two lug bolts finger-tight into opposite bolt holes.
  5. Screw in the remaining bolts.
  6. Tighten all the lug bolts firmly in a diagonal pattern.
  7. Lower the vehicle.
  8. Remove the jack.

Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Mounting the space-saver spare tire - 1

Immediately have the wheels checked with a calibrated torque wrench to ensure that the lug bolts are firmly seated. Otherwise, incorrectly tightened lug bolts can present a safety hazard.

Tightening torque: 103.3 lb ft or 140 Nm.

Replace the defective tire as soon as possible and have the new wheel/tire assembly balanced.

VEHICLE BATTERY

MINI Convertible (2009) - VEHICLE BATTERY - 1

Have any work on the battery, including battery replacement, carried out only by a MINI Dealer or a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer.

Battery care

The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate.

Charging the battery

Only charge the battery in the vehicle when the engine is off. Connections, refer to Jump starting on page 196.

Disposal

MINI Convertible (2009) - Disposal - 1

After replacing old batteries, return the used batteries to your MINI Dealer or to a recycling point. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage.

Always secure the battery against tipping over during transport.

Power failure

After a temporary power loss, some equipment may not be fully functional and may require initialization. Individual settings are also lost and must be reprogrammed:

Time and date These values must be updated, page 68.
Radio In some cases, stations may have to be stored again, page 143.
Navigation system Operability must be waited for, page 112.
Glass sunroof, electric It may only be possible to raise the sunroof, if applicable. The system must be initialized. Contact your nearest MINI Dealer.

FUSES

MINI Convertible (2009) - FUSES - 1

Do not attempt to repair a blown fuse or replace it with a fuse of a different color or

Ampere rating. To do this could cause a fire in the vehicle resulting from a circuit overload.

Have the fuse changed only by a MINI Dealer or a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer.

A fuse allocation diagram is located on the inside of the fuse box cover panels.

In the engine compartment
Close-up of a car's internal battery pack assembly (no visible text or symbols)

Opening the cover

Press the latch.

In the vehicle interior
Interior view of a vehicle showing an open electrical panel with visible wiring and components (no text or symbols)

On the right side of the footwell.

Opening the cover

Press out at the recess.

GIVING AND RECEIVING ASSISTANCE

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

The Roadside Assistance service is there to assist you around the clock in the event of a break-down, including on weekends and public holidays.

The phone numbers of the Roadside Assistance in your home country can be found in the Contact brochure.

FIRST AID POUCH*

Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any items in good time, if necessary.

Close-up of a medical scan device with a black rectangular block inserted into the chamber (no visible text or symbols)

By way of example, the illustration shows the cargo bay in the MINI.

The first aid pouch is located on the cargo bay floor by the left side trim panel.

WARNING TRIANGLE*

MINI
Top-down view of a vehicle front panel with two arrows pointing to a rectangular component (no text or symbols visible)

On the inside of the tailgate.

Press the tab to take it out.

MINI Convertible

The warning triangle is located at the bottom of the luggage compartment floor.

JUMP STARTING

If the car's own battery is flat, your MINI's engine can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.

Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal accident may occur. Carefully adhere to the following sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.

Preparation

  1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the battery.

  2. Switch off the engine of the support vehicle.

  3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Preparation - 1

There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there is a danger of shorting.

Connecting jumper cables

MINI Convertible (2009) - Connecting jumper cables - 1

Connect the jumper cables in the correct order, so that no sparks which could cause injury occur.

  1. Open the battery cover in the engine compartment to access the positive terminal of your MINI.

Interior view of a car dashboard and infotainment system (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
  2. Attach the second terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
  3. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle.

Body ground in MINI:

Close-up of a car interior showing a black handle and a small black object, with an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus/- jumper cable to the negative terminal

of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

  1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed.
  2. Start the engine of the other vehicle in the usual manner.

If the first start attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

  1. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
  2. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence.

If necessary, have the battery checked and recharged.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Starting the engine - 1

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

TOW-STARTING, TOWING AWAY

MINI Convertible (2009) - TOW-STARTING, TOWING AWAY - 1

Observe the applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing vehicles.

MINI Convertible (2009) - TOW-STARTING, TOWING AWAY - 2

Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.

Using a tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the MINI.

It is stored in the onboard tool kit in the cargo bay underneath the cover on the right-hand side, page 185.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Using a tow fitting - 1

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.

Access to screw thread

Push out the cover of the towing eye out of the recess in the bumper.

Front
Close-up of a car's side panel with a black arrow pointing to a textured surface (no text or symbols visible)

Rear
Side view of a car's front bumper with a white arrow pointing to a small black dot on the side (no text or symbols visible)

Being towed

MINI Convertible (2009) - Being towed - 1

Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 51, otherwise the low

beams, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and windshield wipers may be unavailable. Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle raised, as this would allow the steering to turn.

There is no power assist while the engine is off. Thus, braking and steering will require increased effort.

Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depending on local regulations.

Manual transmission

Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Automatic transmission

MINI Convertible (2009) - Automatic transmission - 1

Tow vehicles with automatic transmission only with a tow truck or with the front

wheels lifted; otherwise the transmission can be damaged.

Towing with a tow bar

MINI Convertible (2009) - Towing with a tow bar - 1

The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may

be impossible to maintain control.

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please observe the following:

Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.
The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Towing with a tow bar - 2

Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle

could result in damage.

Towing with a tow rope

When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Towing with a tow rope - 1

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.

Towing with a tow truck
Diagram showing three types of vehicles: a flatbed truck, a parked car, and a moving truck with a crossed-out trunk.

Have the MINI or MINI Convertible transported by a tow truck with a so-called lift sling or on a flatbed.

MINI Convertible (2009) - Towing with a tow rope - 3

Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or body and chassis parts, otherwise damage result.

Tow-starting

Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possible; instead, jump-start the engine, page 196. Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission cannot be tow-started at all.

  1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply with local regulations.
  2. Switch on the ignition, page 51.
  3. Shift into 3rd gear.
  4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch completely depressed and then slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch completely again.
  5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.
  6. Have the vehicle checked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 081 - © 02/09 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

ENTERTAINMENT

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

TECHNICAL DATA

In the technical data, only the values that differ from the Cooper S are shown for the John Cooper Works.

ENGINE DATA

CooperCooper SJohn Cooper Works
Displacement cu in/ cm3 97.5/1,59897.5/1,59897.5/1,598
Number of cylinders 4 4 4
Maximum power outputhp 118172 208
At engine speed rpm 6,000 5,500 6,000
Maximum torque with overboostlb ft/Nm114/155-177/240192/260192/260207/280
At engine speed with overboostrpm 4,250-1,600-5,0001,700-4,5001,850-5,6002,000-5,100
Overboost briefly raises the maximum torque at high rates of acceleration, e.g. when passing.

DIMENSIONS

MINI
55.4/1,407 57.4/1,459; 57.2/1,453 75.3/1,913 57.8/1,467; 57.5/1,461 66.3/1,683 97.1/2,467 145.6/3,699; 146.2/3,714

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 35 ft 10 in/10.7 m. Figures following the semicolons: values that differ for the MINI Cooper S.

MINI Convertible

55.4/1,407 57.4/14,59; 57.2/1,453 75.3/1,913 57.8/1,467; 57.5/1,461 66.3/1,683 97.1/2,467 145.6/3,699; 146.2/3,714

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 35 ft 10 in/10.7 m. Figures following the semicolons: values that differ for the MINI Cooper S.

WEIGHTS

MINI

CooperCooper SJohn Cooper Works
Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras
Manual transmissionIbs/kg2,568/1,1652,679/1,2152,701/1,225
Automatic trans-missionIbs/kg 2646/1,200 2,723/1235 –
Approved gross weight
Manual transmissionIbs/kg3,384/1,5353,494/1,5853,516/1,595
Automatic trans-missionIbs/kg 3461/1,570 3,538/1605 –
Approved front axle load
Manual transmissionIbs/kg1,830/8301,918/8701,918/870
Automatic transmis-sionIbs/kg 1907/865 1,962/890
Approved rear axle loadIbs/kg 1664/755 1,664/7551,675/760
Approved roof load capacityIbs/kg165/7565/75165/75
Cargo bay capacitycu ft/Liters5.7 - 24.0/160 - 6805.7 - 24.0/160 - 6805.7 - 24.0/160 - 680

MINI Convertible

CooperCooper SJohn Cooper Works
Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras
Manual transmissionIbs/kg2,745/1,2452,855/1,2952,877/1305
Automatic trans-missionIbs/kg 2822/1,280 2,921/1,325 –

MINI Convertible (2009) - WEIGHTS - 1

CooperCooper SJohn Cooper Works
Approved gross weight
Manual transmissionIbs/kg3,560/1,6153,671/1,6653,693/1675
Automatic transmissionIbs/kg 3,638/1,650 3,737/1,695 –
Approved front axle load
Manual transmissionIbs/kg 1,863/845 1,951/8851,962/890
Automatic transmissionIbs/kg 1,940/880 2,017/915
Approved rear axle loadIbs/kg 1,786810 1,786/810 1,797/815
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/Liters6.0-23.3/170-6606.0-23.3/170-6606.0-23.3/170-660

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

CAPACITIES

US gal/US quartsLitersNotes
Fuel tank13.2/-approx. 50Fuel grade: page 163
including reserve of2.1/-approx. 8
Window washer system incl.headlamp washer system-/4.8approx. 4.5For more details: page 57

SHORT COMMANDS FOR THE VOICE ACTIVATION SYSTEM*

With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which menu

item is selected. Here are the important short commands for the voice activation system.

Communication

Function Command
For additional information, refer to the separate Owner's Manual.
To open phone >Phone<
To dial phone number>Dial number<
To display phone book>A to Z<
To select from phone book>Call ...< or >Dial name<
To display "Top 8">Top 8<
Redialing >Redial<
To display "Received calls">Received calls<
To display "Missed calls">Missed calls<
To display "Bluetooth" >Bluetooth<
To open "MINI Contact">MINI Contact<
To open "MINI Contact Numbers">MINI Contact numbers<
To open "Nearest MINI dealer">Nearest MINI Dealer<

Navigation

Function Command
To open navigation 120Navigation
To display current position 134Current position
To open "Enter address" 114Enter address
To open "New destination" 114New destination
FunctionCommand
To display "Input map" 119>Input map<
To display address book 122>Address book<
To display destination list 121>Destination list<
To switch on destination guidance 126>Start guidance<
To switch off destination guidance 126>Stop guidance<
To display route criteria 124>Route preference<
To switch on voice instructions 129>Navigation info on<
To switch off voice instructions 129>Navigation info off<
To repeat voice instructions 129>Repeat navigation info<
To display arrow view 127>Arrow display<
To display map view 127>Map<,>Map facing north<,>Map direction of travel< or>Perspective<
To open route 124>Route<
To open "New route" 130>New route<
To change scale 128>Scale ... miles< or>Scale ... feet<
To display towns/cities and streets along the route 129>Route list<

Onboard info

FunctionCommand
To open "Car Data" 62>Car data<
To display computer 62>Onboard info<
To display trip computer 63>Trip computer<
To open speed limit 72>Limit<
Function Command
To activate speed limit 72>Limit on<
To deactivate speed limit 72>Limit off<
To open stopwatch 73>Stopwatch<

Entertainment

Function Command
Tone control 139 >Audio<
To switch on radio 141>Radio on<,>FM on< or>AM on<
To open "FM" 141>FM menu<
To open "AM" 141>AM menu<
To open "All stations" 141>FM all stations<
To select radio station 141>Station ...< e.g. >Station WNYC< or>Choose station<
To open "Presets" 141>FM presets< or>AM presets<
To select preset radio station 141>Preset ...<e.g. >Preset 1<
To open "Manual" 142>FM manual< or>AM manual< or>Choose frequency< or>Frequency ... Megahertz<
To open strongest radio station 142>AM Autostore<
To open "SAT" 146>SAT radio menu<
To switch on satellite radio 146>SAT radio<
To open "Presets" of the satellite radio 147>SAT radio presets<
To open "All channels" of the satellite radio 146>SAT radio all channels<
To open "Categories" of the satellite radio 146>SAT radio categories<
To open CD player 149>CD menu<
To switch on CD player 149>CD<
To open CD changer 149>CD changer menu<
To switch on CD changer 149>CD changer<
To select CD 149>CD 1...6<
To select track 150>CD track ...<
To select CD and track 150>CD 1...6 track ...<
To start sound output for external audio device 155>Audio Aux<

Setup

Function Command
To open setup>Settings menu<
"Display off" 19>Display off<
To open "Info sources">Info sources<
To open "Settings" >Settings<
To open "Door locks" 27, 30>Door locks<
To open "Lighting" 55>Lighting<
To open "Service requirements" 66>Service requirements<
To open "Service" 66>Service<
To display "Check Control messages" 70>Check Control messages<
To activate speed limit 72>Limit on<
To deactivate speed limit 72>Limit off<
To set brightness of Control Display 74>Brightness<
To open "Units" 60>Units<
To open "Language" 73, 129>Languages<
To open "Time" 68>Time<
To open "Date" 69>Date<
To open "PDC" 75>PDC<
To open "FTM" 79>FTM<
To display "Bluetooth" >Bluetooth<

FROM A TO Z

INDEX

„...“ Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions and refers you to the page where these texts can be found.

A

Accessories, refer to Your individual vehicle 4

Activated-charcoal filter for automatic climate control 94

"Add to destination list" 117, 119

Additives

- coolant 177

- engine oil 177

Address for navigation

- deleting 123

-entering 114, 117, 122

-selecting 123

-storing 122

- storing current position 122

Adjusting temperature inside the car, refer to Automatic climate control 93

Adjusting the sound during audio playback, refer to Tone control 139

Air conditioning mode

- automatic climate control 93

- ventilation 94

Air distribution

- automatic 93

Air flow rate 93

- automatic climate control 93

Air pressure, checking, refer to Tire inflation pressure 164

Air recirculation, refer to Recirculated-air mode 93

Air supply

- automatic climate control 93

- ventilation 94

Air vents 92

Airbags 85

- sitting safely 42

- warning lamp 87

Airing, refer to Ventilation 94

AKI, refer to Fuel specifications 163

Alarm system 32

"All channels" 147

"All stations" on the radio 141

All-season tires, refer to Winter tires 174

Always Open Timer 62

"AM", waveband 138

Ambient air, refer to Recirculated-air mode 93

Ambient lighting 91

Antenna, care 181

Antifreeze

- coolant 177

- washer fluid 57

Antilock Brake System ABS 76

Anti-theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 32

Anti-theft system 27

Approved axle loads, refer to Weights 205

Approved engine oils 177

Approved gross vehicle weight, refer to Weights 205

Armrest, refer to Center armrest 97

Arrival time

- computer 62, 63

-destination guidance 126

"Arrow display" in navigation 127

Ashtray 98

Assistant systems, refer to

– Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76

Audio 138

- controls 138

-switching on/off 138

-tone control 139

-volume 139

Audio device, external 97

AUTO program for automatic climate control 93

Automatic

– air distribution 93

- air flow rate 93

-cruise control 58

- headlamp control 88

- storing of stations 142

Automatic climate control 92

- automatic air distribution 93

Automatic station search 142

Automatic transmission with Steptronic 53

- interlock 53

- overriding selector lever lock 55

- shiftlock 53

- sport program 54

"Autostore"

-on the radio 143

"AUX" 155, 157

- AUX-In port 155

- USB-audio interface 156

AUX-In port 155

AUX-In, refer to External audio device 97

Average fuel consumption 61

- setting the units 65

Average speed 62

"Avoid ferries" in navigation 125

"Avoid highways" in navigation 124

Avoid highways in navigation 124

"Avoid tollroads" in navigation 124

Axle loads, refer to Weights 205

B

Background lighting, refer to Ambient lighting 91

Backrests, refer to Seats 42

Backup lamps

- replacing bulb 188, 189

Balance, tone control 139

Band-aids, refer to First aid pouch 196

Bar, refer to Tow-starting, towing away 198

Bass sounds, refer to Tone control 139

Bass sounds, refer to Treble and bass 139

Bass, tone control 139

Battery 194

- charging 194

- disposal 35, 194

-jump starting 196

- temporary power failure 194

Battery renewal

- remote control 35

Being towed 198

Belt tensioner, refer to Safety belts 45

Belts, refer to Safety belts 45

Beverage holders, refer to Cup holders 98

Blower, refer to Air flow rate 93

Bonnet 175

Bottle holders, refer to Cup holders 98

Brake Assist 76

Brake fluid, refer to Service requirements 65

Brake lamps

-replacing bulbs 189

Brake pads, breaking in 102

Brake rotors 103

- brakes 102

- breaking in 102

Brake system 102

- breaking in 102

- disc brakes 103

- MINI Maintenance System 179

Brakes

- ABS 76

- breaking in 102

- MINI Maintenance System 179

- parking brake 52

– service requirements 65

Brakes, refer to Braking safely 103

Breakdown service, refer to Roadside Assistance 196

Break-in period 102

Breaking in the clutch 102

"Brightness" on the Control Display 74

Bulb changing, refer to Lamps and bulbs 185

Button for starting the engine 51

Buttons on the steering wheel 11

C

California Proposition 65 warning 5

Can holders, refer to Cup holders 98

Capacities 206

Car battery, refer to Vehicle battery 194

Car care 181

"Car Data" 63

Car key, refer to Keys/remote controls 26

Car phone

- installation location, refer to Center armrest 97

– refer to separate Owner's Manual

Car radio, refer to Radio 141

Car wash, care 181

Car washes 181

Care 181

- car washes 181

– car-care products 181

- CD/DVD drives 184

- external 181

– high-pressure washers 181

- internal 183

- leather 183

- manual washing 182

– upholstery and fabrics 183

- windows 182

-wiper blades 182

Cargo area

- capacity 205

Cargo bay 103

- convenient access 34

- cover 104

-lamp 90

- opening from outside 31

Cargo bay, expanding 104

Cargo bay lamp 90

Cargo bay lid, refer to Tailgate 30

Cargo loading 105

-securing cargo 106

- stowing cargo 106

- vehicle 103

Cargo, securing 106

Carpets, care 183

Catalytic converter, refer to Hot exhaust system 102

"Categories" 147

"CD" 138, 149

CD changer 149

- controls 138

– fast forward/reverse 152

- playing a track 150

- random order 152

- repeating a track 151

-selecting a CD 149

-selecting a track 150

-switching on/off 138

-tone control 139

- volume 139

CD player 149

- controls 138

– fast forward/reverse 152

- playing a track 150

- random order 152

- repeating a track 151

-selecting a track 150

-switching on/off 138

-tone control 139

- volume 139

Center armrest 97

Center brake lamp 189

Center console, refer to Around the center console 14

"Central locking" 28

Central locking system 27

- convenient access 33

- from inside 30

- from outside 27

Changing bulbs 185

Changing the language on the Control Display 73

Changing the measurement units on the Control Display 65

Changing wheels 192

Chassis number, refer to Engine compartment 176

Check Control 70

"Check Control messages" 72

Child's seats 48

Child-restraint fixing system LATCH 49

Child-restraint systems 48

Chock, folding

- space-saver spare tire 192

Chrome parts, care 183

Chrome parts, refer to Care 181

Cigarette lighter 98

Cleaning headlamps 57

- washer fluid 57

Clock 60

-12h/24h mode 69

-hour signal 69

- setting time 68

Closing

- from inside 30

- from outside 27

Clothes hooks 98

Cockpit 10

Cold start, refer to Starting the engine 51

Comfort access

- what to observe before entering a car wash 34

Comfort access, refer to Convenient access 33

Comfort area, refer to Around the center console 14

Compact disc, refer to

- CD changer 149

- CD player 149

Compartment for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 51

Computer 61

– displays on Control Display 62

-hour signal 69

Condensation, refer to When the vehicle is parked 103

Condition Based Service CBS 179

Configuring settings, refer to Personal Profile 26

Confirmation signals for vehicle locking/unlocking 28

Connecting vacuum cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 99

Consumption indicator

- average fuel consumption 61

Consumption, refer to Average fuel consumption 61

Control Display

- settings 64

-switching off/on 19

Control Display, refer to Onboard monitor 16

Control stick, refer to Onboard monitor 16

Control unit, refer to Onboard monitor 16

Controls and displays 10

Convenience operation

-convertible top29

Convenience start, refer to Starting the engine 51

Convenient access 33

- replacing the battery 35

Convenient operation

- windows 28

Convertible top 37

Coolant 177

-checking level 177

- filling 177

Coolant temperature 61

Cooling fluid, refer to Coolant 177

Cooling, maximum 93

Copyright 2

Country of destination for navigation 115

Cross-hairs in navigation 119

Cruise control

-indicator lamp 13

Cruising range 61

Cup holders 98

Curb weight, refer to Weights 205

Current fuel consumption 62

"Current position" 134

Current position

- displaying 134

- entering 122

-storing 122

D

Dashboard instruments, refer to Displays 12

Dashboard lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 90

Dashboard, refer to Cockpit 10

Data 202

-capacities 206

-dimensions203

- engine 202

- weights 205

"Date" 70

Date

- setting 69

- setting format 70

"Date format" 70

"Daytime running lamps" 89

Daytime running lamps 89

DBC Dynamic Brake Control, refer to Brake assist 76

Deactivating front passenger airbags 86

Deadlocking, refer to Locking 28

Defect

- door lock 30

Defrost position, refer to Defrosting windows 94

Defrosting windows 94

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

- automatic climate control 94

Destination address

-deleting 123

-entering 114, 117

Destination for navigation

- destination list 121

- entry 114

- home address 123

-manual entry 114, 117

– selecting from address book 123

– selecting using information 120

-selecting via map 119

-storing 122

Destination guidance 126

- changing specified route 124

- displaying route 127

– distance and arrival 126

- interrupting 126

-starting 126

- taking detours 130

- terminating/continuing 126

- voice instructions 129

– volume for voice instructions 129

Destination list for navigation system 121

Destinations recently driven to 121

Detour, refer to Driving around a traffic congestion 134

Differential, breaking in 102

Digital clock 60

Digital radio, refer to HD Radio 144

Dimensions 203

Dipstick, engine oil 176

Direction instructions, refer to Voice instructions 129

Directional indicators, refer to Turn signals 55

Directory for navigation, refer to Address book 122

Displacement, refer to Engine data 202

Display lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 90

"Display off" 19

Display, refer to Onboard monitor controls 16

Displays 12

- instrument combination 12

-on the Control Display 16

Displays and controls 10

Displays, care 184

Disposal

- of coolant 177

- remote control battery 35

- vehicle battery 194

"Dist. to dest." 63

Distance remaining to service, refer to Service requirements 65

Distance warning, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 75

Diving stability control systems 76

Door key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 26

Door lock 29

Door lock, confirmation signals 28

"Door locks" 28, 30

Doors, manual operation 30

DOT Quality Grades 171

Drinks holders, refer to Cup holders 98

Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill Start Assist 78

Driving around a traffic congestion 134

Driving dynamics control, refer to Sport button 78

Driving lamps, refer to Parking lamps/low beams 88

Driving notes 102

Driving off on inclines, refer to Hill Start Assist 78

Driving route, refer to Displaying route 127

Driving through water 103

Driving tips, refer to Driving notes 102

Dry air, refer to Cooling function 94

DTC Dynamic Traction Control DTC 77

DVD for navigation 112

Dynamic Brake Control DBC, refer to Brake assist 76

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76

Dynamic Traction Control 77

E

Eject button, refer to Buttons on the CD player 138

Electric power windows

- initializing 36

Electrical malfunction

-convertible top 39

- door lock 30

Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76

Emergency operation, refer to Manual operation

-convertible top 39

- door lock 30

- transmission lock, automatic transmission 55

- trunk lid 31

Emergency services, refer to Roadside Assistance 196

Engine

- breaking in 102

- data 202

– overheated, refer to Coolant temperature 61

-speed 202

-starting 51

- starting, convenient access 33

-switching off 52

Engine compartment 176

Engine coolant, refer to Coolant 177

Engine malfunction

-indicator lamp 13

Engine oil

- adding 177

– additives, refer to Approved engine oils 177

- approved engine oils 177

- capacity 177

-checking level 176

-dipstick 176

- intervals between changes, refer to Service requirements 65

- MINI Maintenance System 179

Engine oil level, checking 176

Engine output, refer to Engine data 202

Engine starting, refer to Starting the engine 51

Entering address 117

Entering destination 115

Entering intersection 116

Error messages, refer to Check Control 70

"ESN" 145, 146, 147

ESP Electronic Stability

Program, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76

Event data recorders 180

Exhaust system, refer to Hot exhaust system 102

Exterior mirrors 46

-adjusting 46

- automatic heating 46

- folding in and out 46

External audio device 97

External audio device, refer to AUX-In port 155

Eyes

– for tow-starting and towing away 197

– for tying down loads 106

F

Fader, tone control 139

Failure messages, refer to Check Control 70

Failure of an electrical consumer 195

Fast forward

- CD changer 152

- CD player 152

"Fast route" in navigation 124

Fasten safety belts reminder, refer to Seat belt reminder 45

Fastening safety belts, refer to Safety belts 45

Fastest route for navigation 124

Filter

- microfilter/activated-charcoal filter for automatic climate control 94

Fine wood, care 184

First aid pouch 196

Fixture for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 51

Flash when locking/unlocking 28

Flat tire

- Run-Flat Tires 173

– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 81

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 78

- indicating a flat tire 80

- initializing the system 79

– snow chains 79

- system limits 79

Flat tires, refer to Tire condition 172

Floor mats, care 183

"FM", waveband 138, 141

FM, waveband 141

Fog lamps

-replacing bulb 187,189

Folding rear seat backrest 104

Folding roof, refer to Convertible top with integrated sliding sunroof 37

Footbrake, refer to Braking safely 103

Footwell lamps 90

For your own safety 5

Frequency, selecting manually 142

Front airbags 85

Front fog lamps 90

-replacing bulb 187

Front seat adjustment 42

Frost on windows, refer to Defrosting windows 94

"FTM" 82

FTM, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 78

Fuel 163

-gauge 61

– high-quality brands 163

- quality 163

- specifications 163

- tank capacity 206

Fuel clock, refer to Fuel gauge 61

Fuel display, refer to Fuel gauge 61

– releasing in the event of electrical malfunction 162

Fuses 195

G

Garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 95

Gasoline

– refer to Average consumption 61

Gasoline display, refer to Fuel gauge 61

Gasoline, refer to Required fuel 163

Gear indicator

- automatic transmission with Steptronic 53

Gear shifting

- automatic transmission 53

– manual transmission 53

Gearshift lever

- automatic transmission with Steptronic 53

- manual transmission 53

General driving notes 102

Glass sunroof, electric 35

– convenient operation 28, 29

- opening, closing 35

- raising 35

- remote control 28

Glove compartment 96

GPS navigation, refer to Navigation system 112

Grills 92

Gross vehicle weight, refer to Weights 205

H

Halogen lamps

-replacing bulb 186

Handbrake, refer to Parking brake 52

Hands-free system 14

Hazard warning flashers 14

"HD radio" 144

HD radio, refer to High Definition Radio 144

Head airbags 85

Head restraints 44

- sitting safely 42

Headlamp control, automatic 88

Headlamp flasher 55

-indicator lamp 11, 13

Headlamps

-replacing bulb 186

Headlamps, care 182

Heated

- mirrors 46

- rear window 94

-seats45

Heating

- mirrors 46

- rear window 94

-seats45

Heavy loads, refer to Stowing cargo 106

Height adjustment

-seats 43

- steering wheel 47

Height, refer to Dimensions 203

High beams 89

- headlamp flasher 89

-indicator lamp 13

-replacing bulb 186

High Definition Radio, refer to HD Radio 144

High water, refer to Driving through water 103

Highways, refer to Route criteria 124

Hill Start Assist 78

Hills 103

Holders for cups 98

Home address 123

"Home address" in navigation 124

Homepage 4

Horn 10

Hot exhaust system 102

"Hour memo" 69

"House number" in destination entry 117

Hydroplaning 102

|

IBOC, refer to HD Radio 144

Ice warning 60

Icy roads, refer to Outside temperature warning 60

ID3 tag, refer to Information about the track 150

Ignition 51

- switched off 51

- switched on 51

Ignition key position 1, refer to Radio readiness 51

Ignition key position 2, refer to Ignition on 51

Ignition key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 26

Ignition lock 51

Imprint 2

Indicator and warning lamps 13

– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 83

Indicator lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 90

Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 26

Inflation pressure monitoring, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 81

Information

-on another location 120

-oncountry120

-on current position 120

-ondestinationlocation120

"Information" in navigation 120

"Information on destination" 122

Initializing

- Flat Tire Monitor FTM 79

- glass sunroof, electric 35

Installation location

– drive for navigation DVD and audio CD 112

Instructions for navigation system, refer to Voice instructions 129

Instrument cluster, refer to Displays 12

Instrument lighting 90

Instrument panel, refer to Cockpit 10

Instrument panel, refer to Displays 12

Integrated key 26

Integrated universal remove control 95

Interesting destination for navigation 120

"Interim time" 73

Interior lamps 90

- remote control 29

Interior rearview mirror 46

- automatic dimming feature 46

Interlock 53

Intermittent mode of the wipers 56

Internet page 4

J

Jacking points 193

Jets, refer to Window washer nozzles 57

Joystick, refer to Onboard monitor 16

Jump starting 196

Jumpering, refer to Jump starting 196

K

Key Memory, refer to Personal Profile 26

Key, refer to Keys/remote controls 26

Keyless go, refer to Convenient access 33

Keyless opening and closing, refer to Convenient access 33

Kick-down 54

– automatic transmission with Steptronic 54

Knock control 163

L

Lamps and bulbs, replacing bulbs 185

Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/ Low beams 88

"Language" in navigation 129

"Languages" in navigation 112

Lashing eyes, refer to Securing cargo 106

Last destinations, refer to Destination list 121

LATCH child-restraint fixing system 49

Leather care 183

LEDs light-emitting diodes 186

Length, refer to Dimensions 203

License plate lamp

-bulb replacement 189

Light switch 88

Light-alloy wheels, care 183

Light-emitting diodes LEDs 186

Lighter 98

- socket 99

"Lighting" 89

Lighting

-lamps and bulbs 185

- of the instruments 90

– of vehicle, refer to Lamps 88

"Limit" 73

Limit, refer to Speed limit 72

Load 105

Load securing equipment, refer to Securing cargo 106

Lock buttons of doors, refer to Locking 30

Locking

- adjusting confirmation signal 28

- from inside 30

- from outside 28

– without remote control, refer to Convenient access 33

Locking and unlocking doors

- confirmation signals 28

- from inside 30

- from outside 27

Low beams 88

- automatic 88

-replacing bulb 186

Lower back support, refer to Lumbar support 43

Luggage compartment

– emergency operation, refer to Manual release 31

- increasing the capacity 105

- opening from the inside 31

Luggage compartment lid

– emergency operation, refer to Manual release 31

Luggage compartment lid, refer to Tailgate 30

Luggage compartment, refer to Cargo bay 30

Luggage rack, refer to Roof-mounted luggage rack 107

Lumbar support 43

M

M+S tires, refer to Winter tires 174

Maintenance, refer to Service Booklet

Maintenance system 179

Malfunction

-convertible top 39

- trunk lid 31

Malfunction warnings, refer to Check Control 70

Manual mode

- automatic transmission with Steptronic 54

"Manual" on the radio 142

Manual operation

- door lock 30

- transmission lock, automatic transmission 55

- trunk lid 31

Manual transmission 53

Manual washing 182

Map

- changing scale 128

-destinationentry119

"Map direction of travel" 128

"Map facing north" 128

Master key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 26

Maximum cooling 93

Maximum speed

– with winter tires 174

Medical assistance, refer to First aid pouch 196

MENU button 16

Menus, refer to Onboard monitor 16

Microfilter

– for automatic climate control 94

- MINI Maintenance System 179

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

- MINI Maintenance System 179

Microphone for telephone 14

MINI Internet page 4

MINI joystick, refer to Onboard monitor 16

MINI Maintenance System 179

Mirror dimming feature 46

Mirrors 46

- exterior mirrors 46

- heating 46

- interior rearview mirror 46

Mobile phone

- installation location, refer to Center armrest 97

– refer to separate Owner's Manual

Mobile phone, installation location, refer to Center armrest 97

Mobile phone, refer to the separate Owner's Manual

Mobility System 190

Modifications, technical, refer to For your own safety 5

Monitor, refer to MINI controls with navigation 16

Monitoring system for tire pressures, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 78

MP3, refer to Compressed audio files 149

Multifunction switch

– refer to Turn signals/headlamp flasher 55

– refer to Wiper system 56

Multifunctional steering wheel, refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 11

Music track

- playback, scan 150

- random order 152

- search 150

Muting TV 138

N

Navigation announcements, refer to Switching voice instructions on/off 129

Navigation drive, location 112

Navigation DVD 112

Navigation system 112

- address book 122

- changing a route 130

- destination entry 114

- destination list 121

– displaying current position 134

- entering a destination manually 114, 117

- last destinations 121

- opening 114

- route display 127

- route list 129

- searching for a special destination 120

– selecting destination using information 120

– selecting destination via map 119

– selecting route criteria 124

– starting destination guidance 126

– switching off, refer to Terminating/continuing destination guidance 126

- terminating/continuing destination guidance 126

- voice instructions 129

- volume adjustment 129

"Navigation voice instructions" 112

Neck support, refer to Head restraints 44

Nets, refer to Storage compartments 97

"New address" in navigation 122

"New destination" 114, 119

"New route" 130

New tires 173

North-facing map 127

Nozzles 92

Number of cylinders, refer to Engine data 202

Nylon rope, refer to Tow rope 198

0

OBD socket, refer to Socket for Onboard Diagnosis 179

Octane ratings, refer to Fuel specifications 163

Odometer 60

Oil consumption 176

Oil level 176

Oil, refer to Engine oil 176

Old batteries, refer to Disposal 194

"On a new destination" in navigation 120

"On destination" 120

"On location" 120

"Onboard info" 63

Onboard monitor 16

- adjusting brightness 74

- changing date and time 68

- changing language 73

– confirming selection or entry 18

– displays, menus 16

- menu guidance 17

– operating principles 16

- overview 16

-selecting menu items 18

- status information 19

- symbols 17

Onboard tool kit 185

Opening and closing

- convenient access 33

- from inside 30

- from outside 27

- using the door lock 29

- via the remote control 27

Opening and unlocking

- from inside 30

Orientation menu, refer to Start menu 17

Outlets

– refer to Ventilation 94

Output, refer to Engine data 202

Outside temperature display 60

- changing unit of measure 65

-on onboard computer 65

Outside-air mode

- automatic climate control 93

Overheated engine, refer to Coolant temperature 61

P

Paintwork, care 182

Park Distance Control PDC 75

Parking

- vehicle 52

Parking aid, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 75

Parking brake 52

-indicator lamp 13

Parking lamps, replacing bulb 187

Parking lamps/low beams 88

Parts and accessories, refer to Your individual vehicle 4

"Pathway lighting" 89

Pathway lighting 88

"PDC" 76

Personal Profile 26

"Perspective" 128

Pinch protection system

- windows 36

Plastic parts, care 184

Pollen

– refer to Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter for automatic climate control 94

Position

- displaying 134

-storing 122

Power convertible top 37

Power failure 194

Power windows 36

Power windows, refer to Windows 35

"Presets" on the radio 141, 147

Pressure monitoring of tires, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 81

Pressure monitoring, tires 78

- Flat Tire Monitor 78

Pressure, tires 164

Protective function, refer to Pinch protection system

- windows 36

Puncture

- Flat Tire Monitor 78

R

Radio

-autostore 142

- controls 138

- HD Radio 144

- sampling stations 142

-satellite radio 146

– selecting the frequency manually 142

-selecting waveband 138, 141

- station search 142

– stations with best reception 142

- storing stations 143

- switching on/off 138

-tone control 139

-tuning to station 141

- volume 139

Radio key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 26

Radio position, refer to Radio readiness 51

Radio readiness 51

- switched off 51

- switched on 51

Rain sensor 56

"Random all" for audio mode 152

"Random directory" for audio mode 152

"Random", random order 152

Range, refer to Cruising range 61

Reading lamps 91

Rear fog lamp 90

- indicator lamp 13

-replacing bulb 189

Rear lamps

- bulb replacement 189

Rear lamps, refer to Tail lamps 188

Rear luggage rack* 107
Rear seat backrest, folding 104
Rear seats
– folding the backrests 104
Rear window heating 94
Rearview mirror, refer to Mirrors 46
Receiving level of mobile phone, refer to Status information 19
Reception
- radio station 144
Recirculated-air mode 93
Recirculation of air, refer to Recirculated-air mode 93
Reclining seat, refer to Backrest 43
Recording times, refer to Stopwatch 73
Refueling 162
Releasing
-bonnet 175
Remote control 26
- battery renewal 35
- convenient access 33
- garage door opener 95
- malfunctions 29, 34
- service data 179
-tailgate 29
"Repeat directory" for audio mode 152
"Repeat track" for audio mode 152
Replacement remote control 26
Replacing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 185
Replacing tires, refer to New wheels and tires 173
Reporting safety defects 6
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel gauge 61
Reservoir for washer systems 57
"Reset" 80
"Reset" for stopwatch 73
"Reset" for tone settings 140
Reset, refer to Resetting tone settings 140

Restraint systems
- for children 48
– refer to Safety belts 45
Reverse
- CD changer 152
- CD player 152
Reverse gear
- automatic transmission with Steptronic 54
- manual transmission 53
Road map 127
Roadside Assistance 196
Roadside parking lamps 89
-replacing bulb 187
Roadworthiness test, refer to Service requirements 65
Roof load capacity 205
Roof-mounted luggage rack 107
Rope, refer to Tow-starting, towing away 198
Route 124
- changing 124, 130
- display 127
– displaying arrow view 127
– displaying map view 127
- displaying town 129
- list 129
-selecting 124
-selecting criteria 124
- taking detours 130
Route selection 124
RSC Runflat System Component, refer to Run- Flat Tires 173
Rubber parts, care 183
Runflat System Component RSC, refer to Run-Flat Tires 173
Run-Flat Tires 173
- flat tire 80
- new tires 173
- tire inflation pressure 164
- winter tires 174
Runflat Tyres, refer to Run-Flat Tires 173

S

Safety belts 45

- damage 46

-indicator lamp 45

- reminder 45

- sitting safely 42

Safety belts, care 184

Safety systems

- airbags 85

- Antilock Brake System ABS 76

– Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76

- safety belts 45

Safety tires, refer to Run-Flat Tires 173

"SAT" on the radio 138, 146

Satellite radio 146

- enabling channel 146

-selecting channel 146

-storing channel 146

Scale for navigation, changing 128

"Scan"

– sampling radio stations 142

Scan

- CD changer 150

- CD player 150

- radio 142

"Scan all" for audio mode 151

"Scan directory" for audio mode 151

Screen, refer to Onboard monitor controls 16

Screw thread for tow fitting 198

SDARS, refer to Satellite radio 146

Seat adjustment

-mechanical 43

Seats 42

-adjusting the seats 43

- heating 45

- sitting safely 42

Securing the vehicle

- from inside 30

- from outside 27

"Select as destination" 120

"Select current speed" 73

Selecting an audio source 138

Selecting menu items 18

Selecting the route 124

Selection options for navigation 124

Selector lever

- automatic transmission with Steptronic 53

Selector lever lock

– automatic transmission with Steptronic, refer to Shiftlock 53

- overriding manually 55

Selector lever positions

– automatic transmission with Steptronic 53

"Service" 72

Service car, refer to Roadside Assistance 196

Service data in the remote control 179

Service Interval Display, refer to Condition Based Service CBS 179

Service, refer to Roadside Assistance 196

Service requirement display, refer to Condition Based Service CBS 179

"Service requirements" 66, 67

Service requirements 65

"Set date" 70

Settings

-clock, 12h/24h mode 69

- date format 70

Shifting gears

- automatic transmission with Steptronic 54

- manual transmission 53

Shiftlock

– automatic transmission, refer to Changing selector lever positions 53

Short commands for the voice activation system 207

"Short route" in navigation 124

Shortest route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 124

"Show current position" 120

"Show destination position" 120

Shuffled, refer to Random

- CD changer 152

- CD player 152

Side airbags 85

Side turn signal indicator

-replacing bulb 188

Side windows, refer to Windows 35

Signal horn, refer to Horn 10

Sitting safely 42

-airbags 42

- safety belts 42

- with head restraint 42

Size, refer to Dimensions 203

Sliding/tilt sunroof

– refer to Glass sunroof, electric 35

Slipstream deflector, refer to Wind deflector 40

Slot for remote control 51

Smokers' package, refer to Ashtray 98

Snap-in adapter, refer to Center armrest storage compartment 97

Snow chains 174

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis OBD 179

Socket, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 99

Song search, refer to Playing a track 150

Sound output for entertainment on/off 138

Space-saver spare tire

- changing tires 192

– inflation pressure 164

Spare wheel, refer to Space-saver spare tire 192

Speaking, refer to Voice instructions from navigation system 129

Special oils, refer to Approved engine oils 177

Speed 202

- with winter tires 174

Speed control, refer to Cruise control 58

Speed limit 72

- setting 72

Speed limit warning, refer to Speed limit 72

"Speed volume", refer to Tone control 140

Speed-dependent volume 139

Speedometer 12

Split rear backrest, refer to Through-loading system 105

Split rear seat backrest, refer to Expanding the cargo bay 104

Sport button 78

Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 76

"Start guidance" 121, 123

Start menu 17

Start/stop button 51

-starting the engine 51

- switching off the engine 52

Starting assistance, refer to Jump starting 196

Starting, refer to Starting the engine 51

Starting the engine

-start/stop button 51

Start-off assistance, refer to

- DSC 76

– Hill Start Assist 78

"State / Province" in destination entry 115

Station, refer to Radio 141

"Status" 66

Status of this Owner's Manual at time of printing 4

Steering wheel 47

-adjustment 47

- buttons on steering wheel 11

-lock 51

- shift paddles 54

Steptronic, refer to Automatic transmission with Steptronic 53

"Stopwatch" 73
Stopwatch 73
Storage area
- cargo bay 103
Storage compartment, front passenger side 98
Storage compartments 97
Storage space
- storage compartments 97
Storage space, refer to
– Luggage compartment in the MINI Convertible 104
"Store in address book" in navigation 122
"Store" on the radio 143, 147
Storing current position 122
Storing radio stations 143
Storing the vehicle 184
Storing tires 174
Stowage, refer to Storage compartments 97
"Street" in destination entry 116
Summer tires, refer to Wheels and tires 164
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
- engine 52
Switching off the engine
-start/stop button 51
Switching on
-audio 138
- CD changer 138
- CD player 138
- radio 138
Switching on the hour signal 69
Switching the cooling function on and off 94
Symbols 4
- Control Display 19
– navigation system 133
- traffic info for navigation system 133
Tachometer 60

T

Tail lamp, refer to Tail lamps 188
- replacing bulb 188
Tail lamps 188
Tailgate 30
- convenient access 34
- opening from outside 31
- opening/closing 31
- unlocking with remote control 29
Tank volume, refer to Capacities 206
Technical data 202
Technical modifications 5
Telephone
- installation location, refer to Center armrest 97
– refer to separate Owner's Manual
Telephone call, refer to the Owner's Manual for the telephone
Temperature display
- ice warning 60
- outside temperature 60
- setting the units 65
Temperature of coolant, refer to Coolant temperature 61
Temperature setting
- automatic climate control 93
Tensioning straps, refer to Securing cargo 106
"Text language" 74
The individual vehicle 4
Third brake lamp, refer to Center brake lamp 189
Three-point safety belt 45
Through-loading system 105
Tightening the lug bolts
- keys 192
- torque 194
Tightening torque, refer to Tightening the lug bolts 194
"Time format" 69
Tire change set
- MINI Mobility System 191
- space-saver spare tire 192

Tire failure
- Flat Tire Monitor 80
- indicator/warning lamp 80
- MINI Mobility System 190
- Run-Flat Tires 80
- space-saver spare tire 192
– Tire Pressure Monitor 81
Tire inflation pressure 164
- loss 80, 81
- space-saver spare tire 164
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 81
– limitations of system 81
- resetting system 81
- warning lamp 83
Tire pressure monitoring, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 78
Tire Quality Grading 171 Tires
- age 172
- breaking in 102
- changing, refer to Changing wheels 192
- condition 172
- damage 172
– inflation pressure 164
– inflation pressure loss 83
- minimum tread depth 172
- new tires 173
– pressure monitoring, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 78
– pressure monitoring, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 81
- puncture 80
- Run-Flat Tires 173
-size 171
- wear indicators, refer to Minimum tread depth 172
- winter tires 174
Tires, FTM 80
Tires with safety features, refer to Run-Flat Tires 173
TMC station, refer to Traffic information 130
Tone in audio mode
- adjusting 139
- middle setting 140
Tools, refer to Onboard tool kit 185

Torque 202

-lug bolts 194

Tow bar 198

Tow fitting 197

- screw thread 198

Tow fittings for tow-starting and towing away 197

Tow rope 198

Towing 197

- car with automatic transmission 198

-methods 198

"Town / City" in destination entry 115

Tow-starting 197

TPM, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor 81

Track width, refer to Dimension 203

Traction control, refer to

– Dynamic Stability Control DSC 76

Traffic congestion

– displaying traffic information 130

Traffic information for navigation

- calling up 130, 131

– display on route map 131

– during destination guidance 134

Traffic information message list 131

Trailer operation

– trailer loads and gross vehicle weight 205

Transmission

- automatic transmission with Steptronic 53

- manual transmission 53

- overriding selector lever lock for automatic transmission with Steptronic 55

Transport securing devices, refer to Securing cargo 106

Transporting children safely 48

Tread depth, refer to Minimum tire tread 172

Treble, refer to Tone control 139

Treble, refer to Treble and bass 139

Treble, tone control 139

"Trip computer" 63

Trip computer 63

Trip odometer 60

Trip-distance counter, refer to Trip odometer 60

"Triple turn signal" 56

Triple turn signal activation 55

Trunk lid

- emergency operation 31

- releasing manually 31

Trunk, refer to Luggage compartment in the MINI Convertible 104

Turn signal indicator 55

– front, replacing bulb 187

-indicator lamp 12, 13

- rear, replacing bulb 188

– side, replacing bulb 188

Turning circle, refer to Dimensions 203

Tying down loads, refer to Cargo loading 106

U

Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQR 171

"Units" 65

Units

– average fuel consumption 65

- temperature 65

Universal garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 95

Universal remove control 95

Unlatching, refer to Unlocking 33

"Unlock button" 28

Unlocking

- from inside 30

- from outside 27

-tailgate 34

– without remote control, refer to Convenient access 33

Upholstery, care 183

USB-audio interface 156

V

Valve

- dust cap 193

Vehicle

- battery 194

- breaking in 102

- cargo loading 103

- dimensions 203

– Identification Number, refer to Engine compartment 176

- parking 52

- storage 184

- weight 205

Vehicle jack 192

-jacking points 193

Vehicle position, refer to Displaying current position 134

Ventilation

- air conditioner 94

Vents, refer to Ventilation 94

Voice commands

- overview 20

- short commands 207

Voice instructions from navigation system 129

- switching on/off 129

- volume 129

Volume 138

- audio sources 138

– speed-dependent control 139

- voice instructions 129

Volume distribution

-front/rear 139

- left/right 139

Volume of cargo area 205

W

Warning and indicator lamps 13

Warning messages, refer to Check Control 70

Warning triangle 196

Washer fluid 57

- capacity of reservoir 58

Washer fluid reservoir 57

Waste tray, refer to Ashtray 98

Water on roads, refer to Driving through water 103

Waterfall lighting, refer to Ambient lighting 91

Waveband of radio 141

Wear indicators in tires, refer to Minimum tread depth 172

Weights 205

Welcome lamps 88

Wheel stud wrench

– space-saver spare tire 192

Wheelbase, refer to Dimensions 203

Wheels and tires 164

Wheels, new 173

Width, refer to Dimensions 203

Wind deflector 40

Window washer, refer to Washer fluid 57

Window washer reservoir, refer to Washer fluid

- volume, refer to Capacities 206

Windows 35

- closing 36

- convenient operation 28

- opening 36

- pinch protection system 36

Windows, indicator on Control Display 16

Windshield

- cleaning 57

– defrosting and removing condensation 94

Windshield, defrosting, refer to Defrosting windows 94

Windshield washer system 56

- washer fluid 57

- washer nozzles 57

Windshield wiper blades, changing 185

Windshield wipers, refer to Wiper system 56

Winter tires 174

- setting speed limit 72

- storage 174

Wiper blade replacement 185

Wiper system 56

"With highways" in navigation 124

Word-matching principle for navigation 125

Work in the engine compartment 175

Wrench/screwdriver, refer to Onboard tool kit 185

X

Xenon lamps

-replacing bulb 186

MINI Convertible (2009) - X - 1

DRIVE ME.

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : MINI

Model : Convertible (2009)

Category : Car